JP7320272B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines.

In a conventional gaming machine, it has been proposed that a variable time reduction game or a probability variable game is started in a normal game after a special game is finished (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2010-99253 A

However, in such a gaming machine, if the special game does not operate, the variable time reduction game and the probability variable game do not operate, so the game becomes monotonous and the player's interest in the game is reduced. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from losing interest in a game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

It has a variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display unit 2163 and the second special symbol display unit 2164) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information,
In a gaming machine for deriving a variation result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after variably displaying the variable display unit,
Game state transition means (for example, main CPU 2201);
Variation pattern selection means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of selecting a variation pattern for executing the variation display game based on a variation pattern table;
Production execution means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of executing production,
holding information storage means (for example, main RAM 2203) capable of storing a predetermined number of holding information for holding display results derived by the variable display unit;
with
The fluctuation pattern table is
A normal variation pattern table that can be selected during the normal game state;
At least a specific variation pattern table that can be selected in the specific game state,
The specific variation pattern table is based on the establishment of at least one of the first condition (for example, when the jackpot ends) or a second condition different from the first condition (for example, reaching B time reduction). is a variation pattern table selected by
The production executing means is
When the game state shifts to the specific game state, it is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a ceiling time reduction rush effect or / and a hit end time reduction effect) that notifies the transition to the specific game state,
When the second condition is satisfied, the notification effect is not executed until a specific condition (for example, start of fluctuation of the second special symbol) is satisfied on condition that the variable display game is executed,
It is possible to execute a series of result display effects for displaying one result summarizing the variation result of the variable display being executed and the variation result of the predetermined number of pending information stored in the pending information storage means,
The series of result display effects are executed in different execution modes depending on whether or not the variable display being executed and the hold information stored in the hold information storage means include a transition to a special game state. It is a production that can be done,
It is possible to display a display corresponding to the number of times the series of result display effects are executed before the series of result display effects are executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the front right diagonally above. It is an example of the exploded perspective view when the 1st pachinko game machine is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the first pachinko game machine, comprising (A) a special symbol variation pattern table for low start and (B) a special symbol variation pattern table for high start. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at the time of start-up in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a power-off process in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of abnormal state monitoring processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and (A) opening mode of the specific area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. It is an example of a special design determination table in the expansion example. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the expansion example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) of the specific area FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a case where the open mode is the first open mode, and (B) a case where the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode. It is a conceptual diagram showing a game flow in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table selection table in the fourth pachinko game machine. In the fourth pachinko game machine, it is an example of variation time when the time reduction table number is selected according to the variation pattern table selection table shown in FIG. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern determination process in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a first modification of the special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a second modification of the special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a modification of the special symbol variable display end processing in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the time chart of the ceiling time-saving rush effect in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a time chart of a short-time rush effect at the end of winning in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the time chart of the direct mode effect in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the time chart of the production state transition production in the immediate continuous mode in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of display by the production state transition production in the immediate continuous mode in the fourth pachinko game machine. This is a display example following FIG. It is another example of the time chart of the effect state transition effect in the immediate continuous mode in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a time chart of a series of result display effects in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display by charge production in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko game machine. This is a display example following FIG. It is an example of a display by the 1st production zone determination production in charge mode in the 4th pachinko game machine. This is a display example following FIG. It is an example of a display by the 2nd production zone determination production in charge mode in the 4th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display by the 3rd production zone determination production in charge mode in the 4th pachinko game machine. This is a display example following FIG. It is a first display example by the effect of the fairy zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko game machine. This is a display example following FIG. This is a second display example by the effect of the fairy zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko game machine. This is a display example following FIG. 110 . This is a third display example by the effect of the fairy zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko game machine. This is a display example following FIG. This is a display example following FIG. This is a fourth display example of the fairy zone effect in the charge mode of the fourth pachinko game machine. This is a display example following FIG. This is a fifth display example by the effect of the fairy zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko game machine. This is a display example following FIG. This is a display example following FIG. It is an example of display by the performance of the divine attack zone in the charge mode in the fourth pachinko game machine. This is a display example following FIG. It is an example of the time chart of the holding continuous effect in the fourth pachinko game machine.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front side, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear side, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left side. The right side when viewed from the front of the machine is the right direction, the top side of the pachinko machine is the top side, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is the bottom side, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is the clockwise direction. , and vice versa, define the counterclockwise direction as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. Also, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed.

In addition, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine that mixes a so-called type 1 type game machine called digipachi and a type 2 type game machine called Hanemono. It is a game machine. The third pachinko machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example in which only one of them is variably displayed will be described. However, it is not intended to exclude the pachinko game machine of one kind and two kinds of machines capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

It should be noted that, in this specification, when simply referred to as "special design", it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

Further, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes, for example, both "variable display" in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner and "stop display" in which patterns are displayed in a stopped state. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination The result of processing (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is determined. It should be noted that although the design appears to be stopped, the results of the special design hit determination process and the normal design hit determination process are not finalized (for example, temporary stop mode). However, such aspects are included in the variable representation above. Even if the symbols are temporarily stopped, for example, the results of the hit determination processing of the special symbols and the hit determination processing of the normal symbols are not determined at this time, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

Also, in this specification, in describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the second special symbol). pattern) will be described as an example. However, for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko machine]
First, the first pachinko game machine will be explained.

[1-1. Appearance configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view when the first pachinko game machine is viewed diagonally from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 . Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained. Details will be described later. It should be noted that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island facilities of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as a payout unit 8, a substrate unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, etc., which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin plate of metal, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it becomes possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a substrate unit 9 attached to the back side thereof and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. - 特許庁In addition, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, and the upper end A glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges at the middle portion and the middle portion, and a plate unit 5 is journaled by the hinges at the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the tray unit 5 forward together or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge.

In addition, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the front side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached to the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. there is The speaker 32 outputs, for example, sound effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, sound effects such as voice notification, error notification, and the like.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 to the hinge (that is, the right end). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3 .

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member with an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see later-described FIG. 4) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front while the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be formed by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) glasses with a gap between them, or by unitizing a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. may Furthermore, in the case of a unitized one, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to be made of glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, below the glass door 4, there is provided an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, the player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated on the hall menu screen by the manager of the game arcade or the like.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 is provided above the glass door 4 . Furthermore, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4 , and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46 . Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for the sake of convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46 . The LED group 46 is, for example, light emitting means for performing lighting effects such as notification with light and various variations of light emitting effects. may be

(dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is formed by unitizing an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. - 特許庁The tray unit 5 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4 . As described above, the tray unit 5 is configured to be opened and closed by rotating it with respect to the base door 3 so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integral plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided so as to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are shot from the shooting device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, a performance button 54, and the like. A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 53 to an upper tray 51.例文帳に追加The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of the hit determination process for special symbols. Also, the functions of the operation unit 66 may be shared.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 . The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out to the lower tray 52 through the payout port 55. - 特許庁

The bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is formed with an opening (without reference numerals) that can be opened and closed by a player's operation. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52 . In addition, when a so-called each-machine counting system is provided for each machine, not only does the ball box not be required, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are reused. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The shooting device 6 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and to the lower right side of the pan unit 5 . The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 62 .

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3 .

The shooting handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61 . The driving device described above is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the shooting handle 62, the game ball is shot by the operation of the driving device. When operating the shooting handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (the amount of operation), the stronger the shooting strength of the game ball.

A game ball shot from a shooting device 6 arranged on the lower right side of the plate unit 5 passes through a shooting rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. The area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) is embossed. In addition, the arrangement position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5 , and may be the lower left side of the dish unit 5 . In this case, the above launch rail is not required, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, making it possible to enhance versatility.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various game-related effect images, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100 . The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or may project an image using a projection device such as a projector. may be In the display area of the display device 7, for example, a performance identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or a special pattern hit determination process result is displayed. A performance image, a performance image during the jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending state of variable display of special symbols, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10. However, if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. You may enable it to be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above various effect images. An image may be displayed.

(Dispensing unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and comprises a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). The payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to the upper tray 51, for example, when the payout condition is satisfied. A power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(substrate unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the rear side of the base door 3 . Various control boards and the like are provided in the board unit 9 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted on a payout/launch control board 93, and a power supply circuit 450 (shown in the diagram below) for supplying power. 6) is mounted on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/fire control board 93 and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all accommodated in the board case. ing.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, not limited to this, for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and a character control circuit 307 (all of which will be described later in FIG. 6) can be provided on a separate substrate. By doing so, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 105. A center accessory 115, a first starting port 120, a general prize winning port 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting port 140A, 140B, and a normal electric role. It has an object unit 145, a small win unit 150, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10.例文帳に追加Incidentally, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7 . A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be seen from the front. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 105 is partitioned (demarcated) by the guide rails 110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 to the upper part of the game area 105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 100, and has an arcuate center rail 116 on the upper side. The game balls shot toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116. - 特許庁

In this first pachinko game machine, of the game area 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is called a left area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is called a right area 107. The definitions of the left side area and the right side area are the same for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine which will be described later.

A game ball shot toward the game area 105 by the shooting device 6 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 107 .

In this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the shooting handle 62, a method of shooting a game ball so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method that causes the game ball to flow down the right side region 107 is referred to as "left hitting". A method of shooting a game ball is called "right-handed hitting". In this way, the player can hit the game ball either toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 .

In addition, the center accessory 115 is formed with a warp entrance 117 at its left outer peripheral edge, through which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 . The stage 118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of and below the display area of the display device 7 . Note that the stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119 at the first start. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Various random numbers such as the random number for judging the jackpot, the random number for the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, and the random number for selecting the effect of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of the various data thus obtained are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the first 1 special symbol symbol random value, reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values of the first special symbol effect selection random value, etc.) is referred to as start information of the first special symbol. Storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension, and the starting information of the first special symbol that is suspended is also called "reserved ball of the first special symbol". The same applies to the second special symbol.

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged in the lower left part of the game area 105, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). . When a game ball enters the general winning opening 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right region 107, and includes a passing gate 126 constructed so that a game ball hit to the right can pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of a game ball to the passing gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected by the passing gate switch 127, various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols) are extracted, and the extracted various data are predetermined. Up to a number (for example, a maximum of 4) is stored. The stored various data are usually provided for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 125 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107 .

Also, the passage gate 126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the condition for transition from a non-jackpot game state (for example, a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device are activated, but the stop display mode indicating the jackpot. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the character product continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), the accessory continuous actuating device is activated. You may make it operate|move and it may be made to shift to a jackpot game state.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbols) etc.) is usually referred to as starting information of the design. Further, until the start condition is satisfied, the storage of the starting information of the normal design is called suspension, and the starting information of the normal design that is suspended is also referred to as "suspended ball of the normal design".

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a big winning big winning hole 131 and a big winning big winning hole count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 to be described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the big winning big winning hole 131. , and the special electric accessory 133 are integrated. The special electric accessary product unit 130 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 105 and below the passage gate unit 125 .

The big winning opening 131 for big hits is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning big winning hole 131, a big winning big winning hole for winning a left-handed game ball may be arranged, or the center accessory 115 may be provided. A big winning opening for winning a game ball may be arranged in the upper part of the .

In addition, the big winning opening 131 for big winning is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled in a big winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the winning entrance. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), ten winning balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 131 for big win is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134 . The special electric accessory 133, that is, the shutter 134 for the special electric, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 for a big win, and to allow a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 for a big hit. ) is configured to allow state transitions to and from impossible or difficult closing states. The state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 131 for big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot jackpot 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in play state.

(Second start port)
In this embodiment, as the second starting opening, the second starting opening 140A and the second starting opening 140B are arranged in the game area 105, and these second starting openings 140A and 140B are both right-handed. A game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting hole 140A and/or the second starting hole 140B.

When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141A (see FIG. 6 described later). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141B (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Even if the game ball wins in any of the second start ports 140A and 140B, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is detected by the second starting port switches 141A and 141B (see FIG. 6 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The received starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second start ports 140A and 140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in the present embodiment, on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit to the right but does not win the big winning opening 131, there are two flow paths 107a and 107b vertically as the flow path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without winning the big winning hole 131 for a big hit is sent to an upper flow path 107a or a lower flow path 107b by a branch nail 108 shown in FIG. 4, for example. distributed.

The second starting port 140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a to win the second starting port 140A. Alternatively, a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a may be configured so that a prize can be won. In addition, game balls that have flowed down the upper flow path 107a but have not won the second starting port 140A are configured to be discharged from the out port 178 to the outside of the machine.

The second starting port 140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win prizes.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged on the downward flow path 107b side, and includes a prize winning opening through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body in which a switch for detecting winning of a game ball and a normal electric accessory 146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141B. However, it is not essential to use the above winning opening as the second starting opening 140B. For example, the first starting opening may be used as the above winning opening.

The normal electric accessory 146 includes a normal electric shutter 147 that can move back and forth, and a normal electric solenoid 148 that operates the normal electric shutter 147 (see FIG. 6 described later). The normal electric accessory 146, that is, the normal electric shutter 147, is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 140B or is easily opened, and in which the game ball cannot enter the second start port 140B. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. Note that instead of the above-described general electric shutter 147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric tulip, which is composed of, for example, a pair of blade members, may be employed. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(small hit unit)
The small-hit unit 150 includes a small-hit big winning opening 151 and a small-hitting big winning opening count switch 152 for detecting the winning (passage) of the game ball to the small-hitting big winning opening 151 (see FIG. 6 described later). , a small-hit shutter 153 that can move forward and backward, and a small-hit solenoid 154 that can operate the small-hit shutter 153 are integrated.

The small-hit shutter 153 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction to enable or facilitate the entry (passage) of the game ball to the small-hit large winning opening 151, and the game to the small-hitting large winning opening 151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to win a prize.

When the game ball wins when the small-hit big winning opening 151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small-hitting big winning opening count switch 152 (see FIG. 6 described later). When a game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch 152 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 151 for small winning is not limited to ten.

Also, the small winning unit 150 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 145 in the downward flow path 107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 146, even if the small winning big winning port 151 is open, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 107b is small. Before reaching the big winning opening 151 for winning, it is difficult (or impossible) to win the big winning opening 151 for small winning because the second starting opening 140B provided on the upstream side is won.

In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 131 for big winning and the big winning opening 151 for small winning are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big winning opening opened during execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

(out port)
The out port 178 is any of various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 120, the second starting ports 140A and 140B, the big winning port 131 for big wins, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are launched toward the game area 105. This is for ejecting game balls that did not win any prizes outside the machine. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, out ports are provided at positions other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 122, between the normal electric accessory unit 145 and the small winning unit 150, etc. A game ball flowing down the area 105 may be discharged outside the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100 as described above. This back unit includes a group of performance accessories 58 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The performance accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 58 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display portion 161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 162, a first special symbol display portion 163, a second special symbol display portion 164, and a first special symbol reservation display. A part 165 and a second special symbol reservation display part 166 are provided.

(Normal pattern display part)
The normal symbol display section 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of normal symbols") is established, the variable display of normal symbols is started, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. be. When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is lit and the normal symbol display LED 161b is extinguished. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric shutter 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140B is reached. Winning (passing) of the game ball becomes easy.

(Reserved display for normal symbols)
The normal symbol reserved display unit 162 displays the number of variable display of the normally reserved symbols (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved normal symbols") when the variable display of the normal symbols is reserved. There, it is equipped with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is suspended" means that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected, and various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of normal symbols, etc.) applied to the normal symbols are It refers to the state from extraction to establishment of the starting condition of the normal symbol. It should be noted that the starting condition of the normal symbol is established when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not being variably displayed and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable display pending normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol pending display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols is normally one, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design lights up and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design goes out. Also, when the number of reserved symbols is normally two, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols light up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is normally 3, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design flashes and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved symbols is normally four, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols blink. However, the display mode of the normal design reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal design reservations is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display part)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164 . The first special symbol display unit 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group 163a including, for example, eight LEDs. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group 164a made up of, for example, eight LEDs.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is established, the first special symbol display LED group 163a repeats lighting and extinguishing alternately or mutually. Variable display of the first special symbol is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display LED group 163a (e.g., eight LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 is specified. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display portion 163 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is established, the second special symbol display LED group 164a alternately or mutually repeats lighting and extinguishing. Variable display of the second special symbol is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol display LED group 164a (e.g., eight LEDs) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 is specified. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display portion 164 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Reserved display for special symbols)
The special symbol reserved display unit displays the number of variable display of the reserved special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols") when the variable display of the special symbols is reserved. A first special symbol reservation display portion 165 and a second special symbol reservation display portion 166 are provided.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. Prepare. ``Variable display of the first special symbol is suspended'' means that the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for judging the jackpot, random numbers for the design of the first special symbol, random numbers for the reach judgment of the first special design, and random numbers for effect selection used when determining the variation pattern of the first special design. Numerical value etc.) is extracted, until the start condition of the 1st special design is satisfied. In addition, the condition for starting the first special symbol will be described later.

The first special symbol holding display unit 165 displays the number of variable display holdings of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol holding display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reserved first special symbols is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a lights up and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved first special symbols is two, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. Further, when the number of reserved first special symbols is 3, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved first special symbols is four, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is not limited to this.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of second special symbols pending when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. Prepare. "Variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, the second Random numbers for jackpot determination of special symbols, random numbers for second special symbols, random numbers for reach determination of second special symbols, and random numbers for effect selection used when determining variation patterns of second special symbols, etc. Various random numbers, etc.) is extracted, until the start condition of the second special symbol is established. In addition, the condition for starting the second special symbol will be described later.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of pending variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a lights up and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is two, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols is four, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of pending second special symbols is not limited to this.

[1-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450 .

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset It has a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected with a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, and the like. The main CPU 201 incorporates a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko game machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202 .

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 to store various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200 . For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the normal symbol display portion 161, the normal symbol reservation display portion 162, the first special symbol display portion 163, the second special symbol display portion 164, and the first special symbol reservation display portion 165. , second special symbol holding display portion 166, general electric solenoid 148, special electric solenoid 135, small hit solenoid 154 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205 .

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, which will be described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 200 includes a first starter switch 121, second starter switches 141A and 141B, a passage gate switch 127, a big win win count switch 132 for big wins, a general win win switch 123 and a big win for small wins. A mouth count switch 152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205 .

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 186 that controls the pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 184, the setting key 174 operated when changing or confirming the setting value in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared in response to the operation of . In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. "Within a given case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also only the corresponding parts of the case corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game hall to expose the back surface, the manager of the game hall can press the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured to allow contact with the clear switch 176 .

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 .

[1-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 200 . Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302 . In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200 .

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 301 .

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7 . The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, image data is provided as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7 . In this manner, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 32 . The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 32 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 .

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 58). The role product control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role product, and a role product data ROM in which operation patterns are stored.

Also, the role product control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

The payout/shooting control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, and a game ball to shoot. A launching device 6 capable of controlling ball rental, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180 . The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving a ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180 . The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 180 . The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) when the firing handle 62 is turned clockwise. It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, and the like.

The power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450 . The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, referring to FIG. 7, the game flow of the first pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 7 is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood visually.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball enters various prize-winning ports (for example, the first start port 120, etc.), the game ball is released. A payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using special symbols and a normal symbol game using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of game balls into the starting ports 120, 140A, and 140B, and whether or not to shift to a big win game state is determined. . In addition, the normal symbol game, for example, executes the normal symbol hit determination process based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and operates the normal electric accessory 146 to operate the winning opening (the second game in this embodiment) This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140B). In this specification, the "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, for example, the normal symbol game and the operation unit such as the production button 54 ( For example, see FIG. 1) is included in "games".

Also, in this specification, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, until this variable display is finished and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is confirmed (derived) (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, if the game state is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state, one special symbol game is performed until the end of the big win game state or the small win game state. do.

In the special symbol game, when the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164, the game is controlled to the big win game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the jackpot jackpot 131 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, maximum 30000 msec) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and the possibility of winning the jackpot jackpot 131 is increased. Relatively enhanced.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating the winning of the normal symbols in the normal symbol game is drawn to the normal symbol display unit 161, the operation of the normal electric accessory 146 causes the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) to open. It will be in an open state, and the possibility of winning a prize to, for example, the second starting port 140B is relatively increased.

In addition, the game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol start winning process which is performed when there is a winning (passing) through the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A, 140B, and Special symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the fact that the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, are included.

When there is a winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A, 140B, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for design, a reach judgment Various random numbers such as random numbers for use and random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are extracted (acquired) respectively. Each random value extracted is retained as starting information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the special symbol is established. When the starting condition of the special pattern is established, the random number value for judging the big win extracted from the counter for judging the big win of the special pattern is referred to, and the special pattern hit judging process for judging whether or not it is a ``big hit'' is performed. After that, stop symbol determination processing for determining a stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol win determination process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability flag is ON, the variable probability control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, if the probability variation flag is off, it is determined that it is a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as a "jackpot probability".

The variable probability flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not variable probability control is to be executed. When the probability variation flag is on, the game progresses in the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed (for example, in the present embodiment, the high probability short working hours gaming state and the high probability non short working hours gaming state). On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is off, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, the normal game state or the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which the probability variation control is not executed.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the random number, the result of the above-described special symbol hit determination process, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern is obtained. (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7, sound effects such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32, etc. is performed. Note that the effect control processing is performed by the sub CPU 301 .

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and the performance control process are finished, and if the game is a big win, a big win game control process is carried out. The big-hit game control process is a process executed in the big-hit game state. When the big win game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-big win game state is performed. In this case, the game state shifts according to the type of the big win. For example, when both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are set to ON, the game moves to the variable probability time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 7, when it is a small hit, a small-hit game control process is performed.

Then, each time the starting condition for the special symbol is established, various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, starting information of special symbols extracted when a game ball enters the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for special symbols, random numbers for judging reach, and effect selection Various data such as various random numbers such as random numbers) are withheld until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the starting information of special symbols can be reserved up to a total of 4 pieces of starting information of the first special symbols and 4 pieces of starting information of the second special symbols. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the starting information of the first special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the second special symbol, or the starting information of the second special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the first special symbol. can be

Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, during the period from when the special symbol starts winning until the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied, when the game ball enters (passes) the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B Based on the extracted starting information, pre-reading judgment is performed to determine the winning/losing (whether or not the "big hit" is won) and the variation pattern prior to the special pattern hit judging process. A production function may be provided. In addition, the above-mentioned look-ahead determination may be performed before or after the starting information extracted by the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B is withheld.

[1-3-2. Normal pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol starting passage process which is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and when a normal symbol starting condition is established. Normal design control processing, etc. are included.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, normal symbol start passage processing is executed. In the normal symbol starting passage processing, normal symbol starting information (for example, normal symbol winning determination random number value, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the normal symbol winning determination counter, and the extracted starting information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the condition for starting the normal symbol is established. When starting the variable display of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not to set the "normal symbol hit". A pattern hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal design hit determination process is referred to, and the normal design variation pattern is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined normal symbol variation pattern, and performs variable display control processing for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and an effect for performing a predetermined effect. Execute control processing. Note that the effect control process may not be executed.

When the normal symbol variable display control process and effect control process are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" is led to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIG. 6). do. When determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes normal symbol winning game control processing. In this normal per symbol game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) operates, and the game to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). It becomes an open state in which winning (passing) of the ball is possible or easy. On the other hand, when determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is not derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in the game state (for example, normal game state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability of deriving the stop display mode indicating the normal winning may be set to 0. Time-saving control is, compared to when time-saving control is not executed, a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of special symbols, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, the third 2 starting port 140B), the control in which at least one of the electrical support control that increases the frequency of opening the opening 140B) is performed. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control.

Then, each time the start condition of the normal symbol is established, various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 during the normal design control processing, the normal design start passage processing is executed. In addition, normal symbol start information extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (for example, normal symbol hit determination random number) is withheld until the normal symbol start condition is established.

In addition, the start of the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the order of being held, and when the start condition of the normal symbols is satisfied, the variable display of the start information that is held first among the start information of the held normal symbols is displayed. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number of the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, the random number for judging the big hit of the second special symbol, The pattern random number value of the second special symbol, the reach determination random number value of the second special symbol, and the hit determination random number value of the normal symbol, etc.) are extracted within a predetermined range ( width) may be used, or a hard random number method may be used in which a random number is extracted from a counter in a random number generator whose random number is updated at predetermined intervals.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 12, basic specifications of the first pachinko game machine will be described.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is executed is not executed, and a low-probability short-time gaming state in which variable-probability control is not executed but time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 can select one of these gaming states. It is possible to progress the game in . However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and any one of the normal game state, high-probability short-time game state, high-probability non-short-time game state, and low-probability short-time game state is progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game progresses in any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state, and the game does not progress in the high-probability non-short-time game state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state and low-probability short-time gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method in the display area of the display device 7, for example.

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 8 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 8, in the first pachinko game machine, by using the above-described setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6 for both), a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6, for example, can be set. Any one of these can be set. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the big hit probability differs according to the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol win determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is not executed is off game state (in this embodiment, for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state) the jackpot probability in the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special For example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1/309. 1/304, setting 5 is about 1/299, setting 6 is about 1/294. In addition, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is executed is on (in this embodiment, for example, a high probability short-time gaming state and a high probability non-short-time gaming state). setting 3 is about 1/76, setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72. Incidentally, although the small hit probability is not shown in FIG. 8, it may be different depending on the setting value, or may be a common probability for setting 1 to setting 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but it is not limited to this. A plurality of setting values may have the same jackpot probability, such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot probability common to setting 5 and setting 6.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, the big win probability differs according to the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the big win probability. For example, in a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a specific winning hole may be varied according to the set value. It should be noted that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 9 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 9 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 8 as an example.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the big hit determination randomness acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 120 or the second start port 140A, 140B. This is a table referred to when a "big win", "minor win" or "losing" is determined by lottery based on numerical values. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process for the first special symbol are only "big hit" and "losing". On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are "big win", "minor win" and "losing". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process for the first special symbol, it is determined as a "big hit" or "losing" based on the extracted random number value for big hit determination. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number determined to be a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number determined to be "loss" and the loss determination value data corresponding thereto.

In this specification, when the value of the variable probability flag is "0", the variable probability flag is off, and when the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the variable probability flag is on.

Also, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, it is determined as a "big hit", a "small hit" or a "lose" based on the extracted random number for big hit determination. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data and , the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judging a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding value data for judging a small hit, and the random number value for judging a big hit determined as a "losing" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number is any one of 0 to 204, it is determined as a "big hit", and the hit/loss determination is performed. The value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number for judging the big hit is neither 0 to 204, it is determined as "losing", and the determination value data is "losing". judgment value data”.

Also, when the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining the big hit is any one of 0 to 850, it is determined to be a "big hit", and the determination value data is " It is determined as “jackpot judgment value data”. In addition, when the probability variation flag is on at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number for judging the big hit is neither 0 to 850, it is determined as "losing", and the determination value data is "losing". judgment value data”.

Similarly, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 204, it is determined as a "jackpot", and the determination value data is It is determined as "big hit judgment value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 205 to 22049, it is determined as a "small hit", and the determination value data is It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is not any of 0 to 22049, it is determined as "losing", and the determination value data is "losing". judgment value data”.

In addition, when the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining the big hit is any one of 0 to 850, it is determined to be a "big hit", and the determination value data is " It is determined as “jackpot judgment value data”. In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 851 to 22695, it is determined as a "small hit", and the determination value data is It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number for judging the big hit is neither 0 to 22695, it is determined as "losing", and the determination value data is "losing". judgment value data”.

[1-4-3. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140A, 140B and the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting the "hit time selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the. The ``select symbol command at the time of winning'' is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of the winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbols is a big win. It is a command for designating the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 10, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, "z0" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 2 to 9, "z1" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, "z2" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, "z3" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is selected even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99. First, "zA3" is selected as the pattern designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command at the time of winning are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 29, "z4" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 30 to 59, "z5" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, "z6" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 99, "z7" is selected as the winning symbol command. is selected, and "zA6" is selected as the design designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 executes a small hit game control process. In the small-hit game control process, for example, by operating the small-hit shutter 153 (see FIG. 6), the winning (passing) of the game ball to the small-hit big winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is possible or easily opened. Execution of the control to become the state, the prize balls can be paid out.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "losing", the symbol selection command at the time of winning is not selected regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, and the symbol is specified. The command "zA7" is selected.

It should be noted that in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 9), hit-loss determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10), a so-called two-stage lottery is performed in which a winning selection symbol command and a symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a so-called one-stage lottery may be performed to determine the hit/loss of special symbols, the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and the symbol designation command based on the extracted random number value for judging the big hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol. good.

[1-4-4. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state, the value of the variable probability flag, the number of times of variable probability, and the value of the time saving flag, according to the winning time selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. , and the number of times of time saving, etc., are referred to when determining the type of jackpot.

In this specification, similarly to the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "big win", the kind of big win is determined as follows. For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation number is "10000", and the time saving flag is OFF. Also, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation frequency is "10000", the time saving flag is ON, and the time saving frequency is "10000". In addition, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation frequency is "10000", the time saving flag is ON, and the time saving frequency is "10000". Furthermore, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the variable probability flag is OFF, the time saving flag is ON, and the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50".

Further, when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "big hit", the kind of big hit is determined as follows. For example, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation number is "10000", and the time saving flag is OFF. Also, when the winning selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation frequency is "10000", the time saving flag is ON, and the time saving frequency is "10000". Furthermore, when the winning time selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the variable probability flag is OFF, the time saving flag is ON, and the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50".

However, the types of jackpots shown in FIG. 11 are just an example, and are not limited to these. When the value of the variable probability flag is determined to be "0", the variable probability number of times is not determined, but the variable probability number of times may be set to "0" in the sense that the variable probability control is not executed.

In addition, the probability variable number of times "10000" is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol hit determination process executed in the game state after the big hit game state ends (that is, the next big hit). Continue to execute the probability variable control. It is the purpose that can be done.

[1-4-5. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 12 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine, comprising (A) a special symbol variation pattern table for low start, and (B) a special symbol variation pattern table for high start. is. It should be noted that the column of "details of presentation" in FIG. 12 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A, 140B. Determine the variation pattern of the design.

In the normal game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 12(A), for example.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which hitting to the right is recommended, that is, in the high-probability short-time gaming state, the high-probability non-short-time gaming state or the low-probability short-time gaming state, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol for the high start shown in FIG. 12 (B) A variation pattern of special symbols is determined with reference to the pattern table.

As shown in FIGS. 12(A) and (B), the variation pattern of the special symbols includes the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (hit-or-lose), the reach determination random number, and the effect selection. Determined based on random values. However, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, compared with the case where the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start , The expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is large. In particular, when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variable over a very long period of time, for example, approximately 600000 msec (eg, long variation A to C). display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for a very short period of time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super-speed variation). .

The main CPU 201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Although not shown in FIG. 12, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, for example, the high probability short time game state, the high probability short time game state or the low Although the variable pattern table of special symbols for high start is referred to in the fixed working hour game state, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-5. Main control processing]
Next, contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 39. FIG.
[1-5-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. FIG. 13 to 16 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power failure signal is at High level (S11). It goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table, although not shown, prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at High level (NO in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when S11 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S12.

At S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 (S12). In this process, the ON/OFF state of the backup clear switch 176 and the ON/OFF state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the ON/OFF states of backup clear switch 176 and setting key 174 are stored in the activation control flag area in main RAM 203 . Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the activation wait of the sub-control circuit 300 side is performed. The startup waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation of the sub-control circuit 300, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, interrupt request signal check processing, WDT output processing when an interrupt request signal is generated, and initialization of various sensors at a predetermined timing. Output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S<b>14 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before activation (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203, it is determined whether the power interruption is normal or abnormal.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (if S14 determines YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15). Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the collation result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, that it is normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

At S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination is NO, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is turned off. If one of them is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO determination in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. Note that the processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170 . As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up to display an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the checksum value collation result of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are determined to be on, the first pachinko gaming machine is not allowed to play a game.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S<b>21 , the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . This processing is performed at the time of abnormal start-up, and stores again the value indicating that the setting has been changed. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

At S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203 (S22). After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, based on the value of the activation control flag stored in the activation control flag area in the main RAM 203, the current activation state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, a clearing process (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.) of a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is performed. It should be noted that this processing is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S<b>25 , the main CPU 201 performs initial setting processing at startup. In this process, an initial setting process is performed according to the current activation state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clearing). Note that the details of the startup initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17 . After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power-off processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. Details of the power-off process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18 .

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial random number. In this process, the initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, a special symbol jackpot determination random number counter, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (when S29 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 saves the register. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S<b>32 , the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor total calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Also, this processing is performed using an area (outside area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

At S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has passed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (eg, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO determination in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, within the main control main process, before the execution of various processes (for example, processing of S37 ~ S44) relating to the game control described later, for example, 6 msec interruption prohibited section (processing section of S26 ~ S35) is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system period), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (eg, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system periodic management timer area within the working area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

At S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. The details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

At S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. The details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, the setting process of the display data output to each display part (for example, 1st special design display part 163, 2nd special design display part 164 etc.) of the LED unit 160 is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

At S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, control processing of the external terminal board pulse signal, processing of setting the output data, processing of generating the test firing test signal, and the like are performed. Note that the process of generating the test-firing test signal is performed using an area (outside area) separate from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs state monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), transmission of a firing position command is reserved. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

[1-5-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the startup initial setting process performed at S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S<b>52 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating power failure recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the restoration from power failure (when S52 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, it is a value indicating RAM clear (NO determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag indicates setting change or setting confirmation (YES determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation command transmission reservation process. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

At S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the first normal game preprocessing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

[1-5-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the power interruption process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is ON (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not ON (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 terminates the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S<b>63 , the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203 . In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-5-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, special symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 19, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71. .

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols is kept for a certain period of time. If it is "0" over the above, the demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a main special symbol demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect. The main special symbol will be explained in the sub-control process which will be described later.

At S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S71.

When it is determined in S72 that the second special symbol is not the timing to start the variable display (when S72 determines NO), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 performs the process is moved to S73. For example, NO determination is made in S72 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (when S72 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

At S73, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S73, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

At S74, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S74, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

At S75, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S74.

When it is determined in S75 that the first special symbol is not the timing to start the variable display (when S75 determines NO), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 performs the process is moved to S76. For example, NO determination is made in S75 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S75 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (when S75 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

At S76, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S76, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

At S77, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S77, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S78.

At S78, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S77.

When it is determined in S78 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S78), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S78 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (when S78 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S79.

At S79, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S79, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

At S80, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S80, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S81.

At S81, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S80.

When it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (when S81 determines NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process, and shifts the process to the main control main process (Fig. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the timing for starting variable display of the first special symbol is reached (when S81 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed, and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S82.

At S82, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control process (S71 to S82) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when processing related to the first special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, in the order of priority, special symbol management processing described later is running.

[1-5-5. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S73, S76, S79 and S82 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

It should be noted that, for example, when the special symbol management process is invoked and executed in S73 or S79 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is processed, and the special symbol management process is S76 or S76 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S82, the first special symbol is processed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 20 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S91).

When it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S91), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). .

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (when S91 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S92.

At S92, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S93 based on the control state number read out in the process of S92.

At S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S93 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This process of S94 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23 . If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

At S95, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S95 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

At S96, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S96 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

At S97, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This process of S97 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S98 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S93 to S98, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 19). It should be noted that the main CPU 201 returns the process to S74 when the special symbol management process is called at S73 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S77 when the special symbol management process is called at S76, and returns the process to S77 when the special symbol management process is called at S79. If so, the process returns to S80, and if called in S82, the special symbol control process also ends.

[1-5-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S93 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S93 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S93 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 21, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S101).

If it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S101), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S101 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S102.

At S102, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is OFF. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S102, even if S101 is determined as YES (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, is ON (NO determination in S102 ), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

If it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, that it is on in S102 (NO determination in S102), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 201 causes the special symbol variable display. End start processing. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S102 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S102 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 6) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit or a loss. In addition, in the hit determination processing of the special symbol, first, the determination processing of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. If it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined to be a loss. After executing the process of S104, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S105.

At S105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result (for example, a big hit, a small hit or a loss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S104). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "win selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol win determination process is a loss. After executing the process of S105, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the kind of a big hit when the result of the special symbol hit judging process is, for example, a big win. In this process, the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 11) is referred to, and the type of big win is determined according to the "hit selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S105). In addition, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but the number of types of jackpots may be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of big wins, a plurality of types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or a plurality of types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process of S106, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S107.

In S107, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S104), the random number for reach determination or/and the random number for effect selection, etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 12A), and the right-hand In the gaming state where hitting is recommended (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 12 (B)) A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to it. After executing the process of S107, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S108.

At S108, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S107) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S108, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S109.

At S109, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 20 S94) is performed. After executing the process of S109, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S110.

At S110, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S111.

At S111, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S111, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

At S112, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, game state management processing (S111) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S112)) is interrupt prohibited. It is preferable to perform it within the interval.

[1-5-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S94 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. 22 and 23 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called at S94 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called at S94 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. In addition, in the special symbol variable display ending process described below, the special symbol to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol not to be processed is referred to as "other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when S121 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

At S123, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded at S122.

If it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on (if S123 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S123 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124.

At S124, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S95 in FIG. 20) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S124, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S125.

At S125, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S126.

At S126, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S126, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small win.

In S127, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is not a small hit (when S127 determines NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S127 that the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small win (when S127 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S128.

At S128, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start or stop the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S128, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

In S129, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a big win.

In S129, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 of FIG. 21) is not a big hit (when S129 determines NO), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process and processes. is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S129 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a big hit (when S129 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

At S130, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the big hit game control process. After executing the process of S130, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S131.

At S131, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S131).

If it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (NO determination in S131), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and changes the processing to special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (when S131 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

At S132, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test-firing test signal is output to the outside. This test-firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a failure. After executing the process of S133, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S134.

At S134, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the winning flag of the other special symbol to a losing flag and sets it. By performing this process, when the result of the hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) of the special symbol to be processed is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol hits. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S135.

At S135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S136.

At S136, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time to the timer for the other special symbol. In this process, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the loss. After executing the process of S136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S137.

At S137, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2". After executing the process of S137, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S138.

At S138, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S138, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S139.

At S139, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. In addition, the other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. be. After executing the process of S139, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

Thus, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21). If the result of (2) is a big hit and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the process of forcibly making the variable display of the other special symbol a failure is performed.

[1-5-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S95 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. 24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called at S95 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called at S95 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S141).

If it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S141), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 20). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S141 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S142, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO determination in S142), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S143. On the other hand, when it is determined in S142 that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the big win (if YES in S142), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S143, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S143, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a failure (NO determination in S143), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S144.

At S144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in S143, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small win (when S143 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the big-hit game control process or the small-hit game control process. In this processing, signals to be output to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) and an island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process of S145, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S146. Signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In S146, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (eg, the big winning opening 131 or the small winning opening 151) (S147), the external terminal board 184 Big hit signal set processing (S148), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149), game state designation parameter setting processing (S150), and transmission reservation processing for the big hit start display command (S151 ), etc. In addition, by performing the process (S149) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 20 S96) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (S141 to S151) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-5-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S144 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 24 and 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S161). Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S161, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S162.

At S162, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S163). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S163, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-10. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S96 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of a big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S96 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S96 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S171).

If it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S171), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S171 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

At S172, the main CPU 201 loads the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small hit game control process. It should be noted that the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S173.

In S173, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening (eg, the big winning opening 131 or the small winning opening 151) is the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of openings of the jackpot jackpot 131 opened in the jackpot gaming state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small-hit big winning opening 151 opened in the small-hit game state is, for example, one.

When it is determined in S173 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S173 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S174.

At S174, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S174) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (Fig. 20 S98) is performed. After executing the process of S174, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S175.

At S175, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S176). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S176, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

Returning to S173, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S173), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S177.

At S177, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of times the big winning opening is opened. After executing the process of S177, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S178.

At S178, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the big winning big winning hole 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected when the big winning game control process is executed, and the small winning big winning hole 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. The big winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is selected. After executing the process of S178, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S179.

At S179, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning openings (large winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening 151 for small winning), maximum opening time of big winning opening, maximum number of winning openings to big winning opening, winning of big winning opening The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the big winning game control process, and corresponds to the opening number of the big winning opening 151 for small winnings when executing the small winning game control process. In addition, it is not intended to exclude one round or a small winning game control process in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S179, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S180.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a maximum of 30000 msec, for example, when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to a maximum of 1800 msec, for example, when executing the small winning game control process. be. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 5 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening is set to 10 for both the big winning opening 131 and the big winning opening 151 for the small winning, for example. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

At S180, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating open/close control data for the big winning openings (big winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is performed. After executing the process of S180, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S181.

At S181, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S181) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S97 in FIG. 20) is performed. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

At S182, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

At S183, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S183, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-11. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S97 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening control process is called at S97 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening control process is called at S97 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S191).

If it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if the determination in S191 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S191 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, a large winning opening winning counter (for example, a big winning opening counting switch 132 for big winning and a big winning opening counting switch 152 for small winning (see FIG. 6) etc.) is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S192, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S193.

On the other hand, in S192, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (if YES determination in S192) ), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S193, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S179 in FIG. 27) has passed.

When it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) has not elapsed (NO determination in S193), the main CPU 201 determines that the big winning opening has not occurred. The mouth opening control process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) has passed (if YES in S193), the main CPU 201 The process moves to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big winning openings (big winning big winning opening 131, small winning big winning opening 151). After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

At S195, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S195) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S96 in FIG. 20) will be performed. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S196.

At S196, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S197, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-12. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S98 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

It should be noted that when this jackpot end process is called at S98 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called at S98 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S201).

If it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S201), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S201 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S202.

At S202, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, the value of various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) is set or reset, and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, symbol fixed number counter, large winning opening counter, large winning opening Winning counter, etc.) is set or reset. The special symbol pause flag is reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S202). After executing the process of S202, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

At S203, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 26 is performed. After executing the processing of S203, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing, terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 19). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-5-13. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numbers (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 30 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the normal symbol waiting time is 0 (S211).

When it is determined in S211 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S211), the main CPU 201 terminates the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait time for the normal symbol is 0 in S211 (when S211 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S212.

At S212, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol (S212). After executing the process of S212, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S213 based on the control state number read out in the process of S212.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S213 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S214 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending variable display of normal symbols. When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

At S215, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. The process of S215 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal design game determination process, the determination process of the normal design derivation result (for example, normal design hit or loss) is performed. When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S216.

At S216, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. The process of S216 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S217.

In S217, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S217 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the normal symbol per end process ends, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In this embodiment, the normal symbol hit determination random number is generated in a range (width) of 0 to 255, for example, and 0 to 255 is used as the normal symbol hit determination value data. Since the normal symbol winning probability is determined by the number of normal symbol winning determination value data with respect to the total random number of the winning determination random numbers of the normal symbols, the winning probability of the normal symbol is, for example, 255/256 in this embodiment. This normal per symbol probability is the same or substantially the same when the time reduction control is executed and when the time reduction control is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time such as 600 sec in a game state in which the time saving control is not executed, whereas in the game state in which the time saving control is executed a relatively short time such as 1 sec. only run. Thus, when the time saving control is executed, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessary product opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game balls to the second start ports 140A and 140B is increased.

[1-5-14. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 31, external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of main CPU 201 will be described. This processing is interrupt processing that is performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when power is cut off. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S221). After executing the process of S221, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S222.

At S<b>222 , the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205 . For the predetermined input ports mentioned above, for example, the states of power interruption detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. are set. is an input port that After executing the process of S222, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not power interruption is detected.

When it is determined in S223 that the power failure is not detected (when S223 determines NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S225. On the other hand, when it is determined in S223 that the power failure has been detected (when S223 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area within the work area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S2224, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S221. After executing the process of S225, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 terminates the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-5-15. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 32, system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of 2 msec, for example, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S231).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S232). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, the power failure is detected) (NO determination in S232), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, the power failure is not detected) (YES in S232), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S233.

At S233, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 reads the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S234), and shifts the process to S235.

At S235, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in a game permitted state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game permitted state based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start-up control flag is a flag for determining which of power-off recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like, the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined to be in the game permitted state, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined not to be in the game permitted state.

The activation control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are off, power failure recovery, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are on, the setting is changed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S235 that the game is not permitted (when S235 determines NO), the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing (S236). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of, for example, 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. Details of the setting control process (S236) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting control process (S236), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246.

When the game is not permitted (when S235 determines NO), the main CPU 201 prohibits the shooting of game balls from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6), sets a specific switch (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). etc.), it is preferable to set the disabling of various switches, prohibition of payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S235 that the game is permitted (when S235 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 201 executes processing for adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt disabled sections during main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S237, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S238.

In S238, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt period timer. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S239. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec) management, and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area within the work area of the main RAM 203 .

In S239, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot judgment random number counters, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to secure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout of balls. After executing the process of S239, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S240.

In S240, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S240, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S241.

In S241, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a transmission reservation process of an effect control command (winning information command) is performed. After executing the process of S241, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S242.

At S242, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S242, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 201 performs register save processing. After executing the process of S243, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, even if the RAM is cleared, for example. data is stored in an area that is not cleared. After executing the process of S244, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S243. After executing the process of S245, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S231, and terminates the system timer interrupt process.

[1-5-16. Setting control processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 33, the setting control process performed at S236 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates a setting change (S251).

When it is determined in S251 that the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (when S251 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting change processing (S252). The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting change process (S252), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the value of the startup control flag does not indicate a setting change (NO determination in S251), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates confirmation of setting.

When it is determined in S253 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the setting confirmation (when S253 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S254). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting confirmation process (S254), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating confirmation of setting, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO in S253), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257. .

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, the currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S255, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S256.

At S256, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, the command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S252), setting confirmation process (S254), or initial setting process at startup (S25) is subordinated. It is sent to the control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S256, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S257, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-17. Setting change process]
Next, referring to FIG. 34, the setting change processing performed at S252 during the setting control processing (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S261). This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 .

If it is determined in S261 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (NO in S261), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S263. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S261), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

In S<b>262 , the main CPU 201 performs update processing within the set value range. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S263.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. You may enable it to change a setting value by operating.

At S263, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S263).

If it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO determination in S263), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (YES in S263), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S264.

At S264, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, as described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S264), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-18. Setting confirmation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 35, the setting confirmation process performed at S253 during the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S271). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S263 in the above-described setting change process (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (when S271 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing (S272). The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, as described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S272), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-19. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 36, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S264 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as the initial setting processing when the RAM is cleared, in the initial setting processing at startup (see FIG. 17), when none of the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation are performed. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S281). In this process, the area in the main RAM 203 in which backup data is stored when the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as "backup area") is cleared (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area in which data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S244 in FIG. 32). Also, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203 . That is, the data backed up when the power is cut off is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, and the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S281), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs initialization command transmission reservation processing. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S256) in the setting control process (see FIG. 33). After executing the processing of S282, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When the first normal game pre-processing is finished, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state.

[1-5-20. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second normal game pre-processing performed at S272 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 35) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 17).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S291). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area within the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the constructed work area within the main RAM 203 . The above data are, for example, game state information, ON/OFF states of special symbol and normal symbol hit flags, pending number information, and other various information necessary for the progress of the game. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is entered. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292 after executing the RAM setting process (S291) at power failure recovery.

In S292, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable probability flag is ON. This processing is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S292 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO determination in S292), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S292 that the variable probability flag is ON (when S292 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 201 sets the variable probability notification flag to ON. This is done in order to notify the state of the variable probability flag at the time of power failure recovery. When the probability variation notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability variation notification LED (not shown) to be lit. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the variable probability flag is on when power is restored. After executing the process of S293, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S256) in the setting control process (see FIG. 33). After executing the processing of S294, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-5-21. Switch input detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, switch input detection processing performed at S240 in the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs abnormal state monitoring processing (S301). The details of this abnormal state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

At S302, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol-related switch check processing. This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 . After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

At S303, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 . And, if the first starting port switch 121 or/and the second starting port switches 141A and 141B are ON, the transmission of the holding addition command of the starting information of the first special symbol and/or the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved. be. In this case, for example, when the look-ahead effect is to be executed, a specific pending addition command is transmitted that can be identified as being pending for the execution of the look-ahead effect. After executing the process of S303, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 performs prize ball-related switch check processing. This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 . Then, if the prize ball-related switch is turned on, a prize ball payout command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process, and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-22. Abnormal state monitoring process]
Next, referring to FIG. 39, the abnormal state monitoring process performed at S301 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38) will be described. Incidentally, FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the abnormal condition monitoring process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs abnormal state monitoring preprocessing (S311). In this process, abnormality detection information (for example, information of various sensors set in the input ports of the I/O port 205 is updated.) to

In S312, the main CPU 201 performs general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing. In this process, a process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality is performed for each of a plurality of monitoring items to be subjected to abnormality detection determination. After executing the process of S312, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs induced magnetic field monitoring processing. In this process, it is determined whether or not the induced magnetic field is detected, and if the induced magnetic field is detected, the induced magnetic field detection information flag is set to ON. After the process of S313, the main CPU 201 ends the abnormal state monitoring process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38).

[1-6. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 40, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S321). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 301 performs read processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S322 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including information specifying the content of the effect, and based on the generated animation request, various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, etc.) for operating various effect devices. request, accessory request, etc.). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 . The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S327.

In S327, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 . Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S328.

At S328, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a role product request to the role product control circuit 307 . Based on the message (character request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the character control circuit 307 controls all or part of the character that constitutes the performance character group 58 (see FIGS. 1, 2, and 6). Drive control is performed to operate the performance drive motor (not shown). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

Although the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is recommended, and the game state in which right-handed hitting is recommended (high-probability short-time game state, high-probability non-short-time game state, low-probability In the time saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbols, display effects such as characters, and voice effects for the main special symbols. For example, when the result of the sub-special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol effect may be performed while performing the main special symbol effect.

[1-7. Small hit rush]
In the first pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small winning rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal game state, a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, and a low-probability short-time game state are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is one of these game states. Control to any game state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended, so the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other game states (high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state and low-probability short-time gaming state), right-handed hitting is recommended, so the winning of game balls to the second start ports 140A and 140B Based on the second special symbol game is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is the first starting opening, the first special symbol is in any one of the normal game state, the high probability short working hours game state and the low certainty short working hours game state. The game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning big winning opening 151 is another game state (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed one.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, a game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 126 . In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second start opening 140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the big hit game control process is executed, the big winning opening 131 for the big hit will not be in the open state, so the frequency in which the second start opening 140B is in the open state in the high-probability non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state Therefore, if the small-hit large winning opening 151 is open, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win the small-hitting big winning opening 151.例文帳に追加When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 151 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win the second starting port 140A. When the game ball wins in the second starting ports 140A and 140B, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 9), a stop indicating a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/3 (approximate) Not only the display mode is derived, but also super speed fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table of special symbols for high start (see FIG. 12 (B)). The winning frequency of the game ball into the big winning opening 151 for winning is increased compared with other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability short working hours game state, low probability short working hours game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small winning rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) paid out per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, high accuracy time saving game state, low accuracy time saving game state), the second start port 140B is opened by executing the electric sapo control, and is struck to the right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b end up winning the second starting port 140B. Therefore, even if the small-hit large winning opening 151 is open, the expectation value of the game ball winning the small-hitting large winning opening 151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow-down path 107a enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. Of the game balls distributed to the path 107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win prizes. Thus, in the gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) to be paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is recommended, but if hitting to the right is performed, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passage gate 126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is derived. There is a possibility that the small winning large winning opening 151 is opened by the normal electric accessory 146 being operated and the game ball winning in the second starting opening 140B. However, in the normal game state, since the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 12(A)), provisionally, the second start ports 140A and 140B are used for the game. Even if the ball wins, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in one of the long variations A to C having extremely long variation times, and the frequency of opening the small winning big winning opening 151 is extremely small. Therefore, there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state. When the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is used as the first starting opening, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal game state is set to 0, for example, so as not to generate the actual profit of hitting to the right. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be a small hit rush in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be made to be a small hit rush in a high-probability short-time gaming state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is performed without performing the electric support control.

[1-8. Signals output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Signals are explained. In addition, although the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described in this embodiment, it may be possible to input the signal from the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8 ”, “prize information 2” and “security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. It may be configured such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 41 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 41, CN1 outputs a "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs a "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko game machine to the outside are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 42 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 42, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the big winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big winning or big winning opening 151 for small winning (both see FIG. 4)), for example, 10 prizes are awarded. When the ball is paid out and the game ball wins the starting port (first starting port 120 or second starting port 140A (both see FIG. 4)), for example, three prize balls are paid out, and the general winning port When a game ball wins at 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for 120 msec, for example, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for, for example, 120 msec at the timing when the tenth prize ball payout detection switch is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Information 1” signal is output. It should be noted that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the tenth prize ball is turned on is merely an example. Any period from when it is turned on to when it is turned off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting it for 120 msec is just an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of the "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine, will be described. A "security" signal is a signal output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 43 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko game machine. 44 is a table showing release triggers at , output times of "security" signals (illustrated as "security signals" in FIG. 43), and remarks.

The outline of errors shown in FIG. 43 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, errors not shown in FIG. 43 may be judged to be errors. You may do so. Errors that are not shown in FIG. 43 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or longer, a large winning opening If there is a game ball that has not been ejected inside the winning hole 131 or the big winning hole 151 for small winning (both see FIG. 4), or if there is a prize in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, the big winning hole is entered. Abnormal ejection errors, vibration sensor errors when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined period of time, and the like correspond. Also, for example, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening 131 for big hit, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control, the probability variable control is executed after the big hit game control is finished. In some cases, it is determined as an error when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball in the big winning prize opening 131, or when there is no game ball passing through the specific area. It is preferable to configure so as to

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection information executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6 for both) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where an abnormal winning error occurs in the big winning opening for big winning.

As shown in FIG. 43, for example, when the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) detects a winning prize before the first big win big winning hole 131 (see FIG. 4) is opened after the initial power is turned on, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) ) judges that an abnormal winning error has occurred, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. In addition, it transmits to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, since the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, an external device (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6) ) and the island computer (not shown)) can recognize the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot ascertain the content of the error. However, without being limited to this, for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. good too.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, a big winning opening abnormal winning error for a big win, for example, it executes all or part of the following notification control, and receives the fraud detection-related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is terminated.
Information control for displaying characters such as "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304;
- Notification control for outputting a voice such as "It is a big winning opening abnormal winning error."
• Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep sound from a speaker via the voice control circuit 305 .
Information control for causing the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) through the LED control circuit 306 to light up in red, for example.

Note that if there is a power failure before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the sub CPU 301 terminates the above-described notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal jackpot winning error during execution of the above-described notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-described Re-execute notification control.

Next, the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a table showing an example of signals output according to the game state in the first pachinko game machine. In FIG. 44, signals to be output are indicated by ◯, and signals not to be output are indicated by x.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, different signals are output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201 . For example, during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability variation / time reduction), neither signal is output, ” and “external information 7” signals are output, and the signals of “external information 3”, “external information 5” and “external information 7” are output during the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot and during the small hit) Signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are outputted during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big win and during the small win).

In this way, by varying the signal output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (for example, (not shown)) can grasp the state of the game in the pachinko gaming machine to which the external information is sent.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state other than). Similarly, the signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the low-probability short-time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the low-probability short-time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), The signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the high-probability short-time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high-probability short-time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and the small hit game The signal output during the control process (during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving a signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small winning game control process in a pachinko gaming machine to which external information is sent. It is not possible to ascertain whether or not However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small-win game control process different from the signal output when the small-win game control process is not being performed, the small-win game machine to which the external information is transmitted can achieve a small win. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by an external device capable of receiving a signal.

In addition, during the low-probability short-time gaming state shown in FIG. During the time-saving game state) and during the small winning game control process (during the high-probability time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control are being executed, and only the electric sapo control is executed out of the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control It may be said that the time saving control is being executed when there is, and it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when only the special figure shortening control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. The second pachinko machine is, as described above, a type 1 pachinko machine called digipachi. However, the second pachinko machine differs from the first pachinko machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. . Therefore, the game board unit and electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 46) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (for example, , Hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 46) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine in terms of function, shape, arrangement position, etc. We shall omit the explanation as much as possible.

In describing the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the second pachinko machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko machine, the first pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

By the way, as a pachinko machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variation machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the variable display of is suspended; There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequential variation machine") in which the starting condition is satisfied in the order of winning, including the first starting port and the second starting port.

In the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol are being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, etc., is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, and the starting condition of the second special symbol is the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not in variable display, not in a jackpot game state, etc., and when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, etc.

In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and , that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the first special symbol, is established when at least all are satisfied, and the starting condition of the second special symbol is that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are It is established when at least all of the conditions that variable display is not being performed, that the variable display of the second special pattern is suspended, and that the earliest suspension is the suspension of the variable display of the second special pattern are satisfied.

In the following, the priority change machine will be described as an example.

[2-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 1010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) as in the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 45 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 1010, a game area 1105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 1120, etc.) arranged in the game area 1105 of the second pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 45, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110. A center accessory 1115, a first starting port 1120, a general prize winning port 1122, a passage gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, a second starting port 1140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 1145, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted for this second pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007 . In addition, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) or the like is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 1105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The game area 1105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 1110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 1006 (see FIG. 46 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 1105 by the shooting device 1006 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 1106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 1107 .

Further, the center accessory 1115 is formed with a warp entrance 1117 at its left outer peripheral edge portion into which a game ball flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115 . The stage 1118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 1007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 1118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 1120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 1120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passing gate 1126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 46, which will be described later), is integrated with the unit body, and is arranged in the right region 1107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 1125 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 1125 may be located in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric role product unit 1130 integrates a big prize slot 1131, a count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later) for detecting the winning (passage) of a game ball into the big prize slot 1131, and a special electric role product 1133. It is a unit body that has become. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right area 1107 .

The big winning opening 1131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 1131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a game is played in the upper part of the center accessory 1115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

The big winning hole 1131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when controlled to a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is detected by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later), ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 1131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 46 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134 . The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the large winning opening 1131 or is easily open, and cannot enter (pass through) a game ball into the large winning opening 1131. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time over a plurality of rounds. state.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 1140 is arranged in the left region 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120). However, the second starting port 1140 is difficult or impossible to win a game ball hit to the left due to, for example, a game nail, etc., so that the game ball hit to the right can win is configured to be guided to the vicinity of However, it is not essential to configure the second starting port 1140 as described above, and it may be provided in the right region 1107 so that, for example, a right-handed game ball can win. In addition, the second starting port 1140 may be configured so that left-handed game balls can win.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later). When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 1140 is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 1140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged in the left area 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first start port 1120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) the game balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole to which a game ball enters, a switch for detecting winning of a game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146 . In the present embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141 .

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a general electric movable member 1147 called an electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 46 described later) for operating the general electric movable member 1147 . Ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, ordinary electric movable member 1147, is an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second start port 1140, and a game ball cannot enter the second start port 1140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from possible or difficult closed states. Note that instead of the general electric movable member 1147, which is a so-called electric chew, for example, a shutter that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction may be employed.

(out port)
The out port 1178 is shot toward the game area 1105, but does not win any of the various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140, the big winning port 1131, the general winning port 1122, etc.). It is for ejecting missing game balls out of the machine. This out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 1122, so as to discharge the game balls flowing down the game area 1105 to the outside of the machine. can be

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 1010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 1100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007 and has a group 1058 of performance characters such as movable characters controlled by the sub-control circuit 1300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 46, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 46 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 46, the second pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 1200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 1300 , a payout/fire control circuit 1400 , and a power supply circuit 1450 .

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main CPU 1201 is connected with a main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like. The main CPU 1201 incorporates a WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko game machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202 .

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 1206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 1300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200 . For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display portion 1161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 1162, a first special symbol display portion 1163, a second special symbol display portion 1164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 1165, a 2 special symbol holding display portion 1166, general electric solenoid 1148, special electric solenoid 1135 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuitry 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205 .

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of, for example, a pachinko game machine with a setting function. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 1200 are a first starter switch 1121, a second starter switch 1141, a passage gate switch 1127, a count switch 1132, a general winning switch 1123, and the like. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205 .

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 1184, setting key 1174 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, and backup data stored in main RAM 1203 are transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with an operation is connected. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 1176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. good too.

Also, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 corresponding to the case. When the notch is provided and the key managed by the person in charge of the game hall is used to rotate the pachinko game machine from the island facility to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 1174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 1176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 .

[2-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a character control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 1200 . Although not shown in FIG. 46, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302 . In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls game effects according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

A work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 1301 .

A display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007 . The display control circuit 1304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 1032 . The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 1032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 1301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 1032 .

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 1058). The role item control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. , a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 1200, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180 . The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of a ball lending card storing cash data (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180 . The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180 . Although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) when the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise. (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450 . The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. The second pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is not executed A low-probability, time-saving game state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 1201 can progress the game in any one of these game states.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the high-probability short-time gaming state and the low-probability short-time gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 47 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process. This table is referred to when determining "losing" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are only "big win" and "losing", and other lottery targets (for example, small wins) are not included. When a game ball wins at 1140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, in the special symbol hit determination process, a "big hit" or "loss" is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number. In the special symbol hit determination table, for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the range of the jackpot determination random number ( width) and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judging random number value determined as “losing” and the corresponding loss judgment value data. there is

In this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number is any one of 0 to 204, it is said to be a "big hit". It is determined, and the determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number for judging the big hit is neither 0 to 204, it is determined as "losing" and determined. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Also, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 0 to 935, it is determined as a "big hit", The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for judging the big hit is neither 0 to 935, it is determined as "losing" and determined. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

[2-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 48 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the starting ports 1120 and 1140 and the aforementioned determination value data, and determines the stop symbol "select symbol command at the time of winning". ” and “symbol designating command” are referred to. The ``select symbol command at the time of winning'' is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of the winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbols is a big win. It is a command for designating the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 48, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, "z0" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, "z1" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, "z2" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is selected even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99. First, "zA3" is selected as the pattern designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command at the time of winning are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, "z3" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, "z4" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is selected even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99. First, "zA5" is selected as the pattern designation command.

[2-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 49 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table includes the number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state, the value of the probability variable flag, the value of the time reduction flag, and the number of probability variables according to the winning time selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. , and the number of times of time saving, etc., are referred to when determining the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol winning determination process is "big win", the kind of big win is determined as follows. For example, if the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the number of variable probability is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", the number of time saving is " 10000”. Also, if the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "4", the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the number of variable probability is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving is " 10000”. In addition, when the winning time selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the value of the variable probability flag is determined to be "0", the value of the time saving flag is determined to be "1", and the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50".

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the kind of big hit is determined as follows. For example, if the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the number of variable probability is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving is " 10000”. In addition, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the value of the variable probability flag is determined to be "0", the value of the time saving flag is determined to be "1", and the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50".

However, the types of jackpots shown in FIG. 49 are only examples, and are not limited to these. As described above, when the value of the probability variation flag is determined to be "0", the probability variation number is not set, but the probability variation number may be set to "0" in the sense that the probability variation control is not executed. .

A time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in main RAM1203 like a probability variation flag, and is a flag for managing whether time saving control is performed. Time saving game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, in the present embodiment high probability time saving game state and low probability time saving game state), the time saving flag is set to ON, time saving control is not executed game state (for example, In the present embodiment, when the normal game state), the time saving flag is set to OFF.

Moreover, the number of times of shortening of working hours is the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed by continuing the shortening of working hours control. That is, for example, when the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50", if variable display of special symbols is performed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time saving game state, this time saving game state is terminated and non-time saving game is played. It shifts to a state (for example, normal game state in this embodiment).

It should be noted that, as described above, the probability variation number "10000" is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol hit determination process executed in the game state after the end of the big hit game state (that is, the next big hit). It is intended to be continuously implemented. Similarly, "10000" of the number of times of time saving means that the time saving control can be continuously executed until the next big hit.

[2-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 50 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the second pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the column of "details of presentation" in FIG. 50 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and determines the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140. Determining fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 50, the variation pattern of the special symbols includes the type of the special symbols, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbols (hit-or-lose), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random number, or/ And, although it is determined based on the random number value for effect selection or the like, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values or the like instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 1308 of the sub CPU 1301 via the command output port 1206 . The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201 .

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control processing will be described below, and description of other processing executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. In addition, the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 29, Fig. 59), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S1001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 1201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S1001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

If it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S1002), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S1002 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1003.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S1003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO determination in S1003), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S1004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S1004), the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S1004 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 advances the processing to S1005. to

Returning to S1003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S1003 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process of Move to S1005.

At S1005, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the second pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 1120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second start port 1140 .

[2-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol if the determination is YES in S1003 of the special symbol control process, and the first special symbol if the determination is YES in S1004 of the special symbol control process. It is subject to processing.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 52 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S1011).

If it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1011), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1012.

At S1012, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1013. It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes after S1013 based on the control state number read in the process of S1012.

At S1013, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S1013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1014.

At S1014, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S1014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1015.

At S1015, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S1015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1016.

At S1016, the main CPU 1201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S1016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1017.

At S1017, the main CPU 1201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S1017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1018.

In S1018, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S1018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S1013 to S1018, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S1021 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

At S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023.

At S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 47) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, a process for determining whether or not the game is a big hit is performed. After executing the process of S1023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S1024.

At S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result (for example, a big hit or a loss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 48) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "hit time selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1024, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the kind of a big hit when the result of the special symbol hit judging process is, for example, a big win. In this process, the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 49) is referred to, and the type of the big hit is determined according to the "hit selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1024). In addition, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but the number of types of jackpots may be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of big wins, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but the result of the special symbol win determination process may include a small win, and a plurality of types of such small wins may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50), for example, the type of special design, the result of the hit determination process (S1023) of the special design, the random number for reach determination or / and the random number for selection of effect etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. It should be noted that the variation pattern table to be referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different according to the game state or the like. After executing the process of S1026, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

At S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S1027, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

At S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 52 S1014) is performed. After executing the process of S1028, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1029.

At S1029, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1029, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1030.

At S1030, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1030, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1031.

At S1031, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S1030) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S1031)) within the interrupt prohibited section. It is preferable to use

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1041).

If it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1041), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S1041), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

At S1042, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1015 in FIG. 52) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S1042, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1043.

At S1043, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1043, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1044.

At S1044, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine, the symbol determination number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol determinations (the number of executions of the special symbol game), but for example, the probability variation remaining number and time saving The number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of games, may be managed. After executing the process of S1044, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 52). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S1051 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S1052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (if YES in S1052), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this processing, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 45 for both) via external terminal board 1184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S1053, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 1131 (S1055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S1057), game state designation parameter setting processing (S1058), and transmission reservation processing (S1059) of the big hit start display command. In addition, by performing the process (S1057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol game determination process ends, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 52 S1016) is performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

Returning to S1052, if it is determined in S1052 that the stopped special symbol is not a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO in S1052), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

At S1060, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S1051 to S1060) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1060 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first sets the special symbol control state number to "0" (S1061). Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1061, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

At S1062, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1063). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1063, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52) as described above.

[2-4-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1016 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S1071), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S1071 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . After executing the process of S1072, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S1073 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1077.

At S1074, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S1074) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the jackpot end processing (Fig. 52 S1018) is performed. After executing the process of S1074, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

At S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S1076). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S1076, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

In S1077, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S1077, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1078.

At S1078, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 1131, the number of winning balls when winning the large winning opening 1131, etc. are set. . The number of rounds corresponds to the number of openings of the big winning opening 1131 . It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1078, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1079.

At S1079, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 1131 is performed. After executing the process of S1079, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1080.

At S1080, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S1080) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S1017 in FIG. 52) is performed. After executing the process of S1080, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1081.

At S1081, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1081, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1082.

In S1082, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1082, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the big winning hole opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1091).

If it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S1091), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S1091 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

At S1092, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 45) for counting the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 1132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 .

When it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 1131 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO determination in S1092), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when S1092 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

At S1093, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 1131 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1078 in FIG. 57) has passed.

When it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has not elapsed (NO determination in S1093), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 1131 has elapsed (YES in S1093), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

At S<b>1094 , the main CPU 1201 performs closing setting processing for the big winning opening 1131 . After executing the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1095.

At S1095, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S1095) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S1016 in FIG. 52) is performed. After executing the process of S1095, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1096.

At S1096, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1096, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1097.

In S1097, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1097, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S1101), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S1101 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

At S1102, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning mouth winning counter, etc.) Set the value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

At S1103, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed. After executing the processing of S1103, the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52), and returns to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 51). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be explained. As described above, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and has a first route and a second route as routes until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is A first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived. In the second route, the V-attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a prize released", and the game ball entering the released V-attacker is V This is the case of winning the V winning slot in the attacker.

The third pachinko game machine is a sequential variation machine that does not variably display the first special symbols and the second special symbols in parallel, but variably displays them in order of winning. However, it is not limited to this, and may be the priority change machine described above.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 2184 (see FIG. 61) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (for example, , Hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine in terms of function, shape, arrangement position, etc. We shall omit the explanation as much as possible.

In describing the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko game machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 60 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 2120, etc.) arranged in the game area 2105 of the third pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 60, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and a guide rail 2110, and a guide rail 2110 and a guide rail 2110, center accessory 2115, first starting port 2120, second starting port 2140, general prize winning port 2122, passage gate unit 2125, special electric accessory unit 2130, and ordinary electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2149, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 2149 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this third pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007 . A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 2105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 2110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball fired from a launching device 2006 (see FIG. 61 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 2105 by the shooting device 2006 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 2106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 2107 .

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the left outer peripheral edge thereof into which a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115 . The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 2118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 2120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win in the first starting port 2120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting port 2140 .

When the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. FIG. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by a general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right area 2107, and includes a passing gate 2126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 61, which will be described later), and is arranged in the right region 2107, and is constructed so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 2125, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 2125 may be located in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107 .

The big winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the large winning hole 2131, a large winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a game is played on the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled to a big win game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 2131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later), ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 61 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134 . The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be transitionable to and from a closed state. The big winning port 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big win game state is entered through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that makes it possible.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls to the winning opening, a normal electric It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146 and arranged in the right area 2107 . In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141 .

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a normal electric shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, and a normal electric solenoid 2148 that operates the normal electric shutter 2147 (see FIG. 61 to be described later). The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the normal electric shutter 2147, is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 2140 or is easily opened, and in which the game ball cannot enter the second start port 2140. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. It should be noted that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107 . The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning port 2151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and close the opening/closing winning port 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V-attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. Attacker count switch 2153, V winning port 2155 through which game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 are V A V winning opening switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball has entered (passed through) a winning opening 2155, and a game ball that has entered the interior of the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning opening 2151 but has not entered the V winning opening 2155. A loss port 2157 into which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a V winning. A locking member 2160 capable of holding only one of the game balls entered inside the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126 or may be provided in the left area 2106 .

The V-attacker 2152 consists of members along an arc, and is always in a closed state to close the open/close winning opening 2151 . Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and a stop display mode indicating that it is a "accessory hit" described later is derived, almost simultaneously with the completion of the variable display of the special symbols, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 ( 61, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 operates, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is activated once, the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened for 1800 msec, for example. While the open/close winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

It should be noted that the manner in which the V-attacker 2152 is released when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory hit" is derived is not limited to the above. It may be closed based on a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 .

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 . When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and performs the functions of the main CPU 2201. The value of the V Attacker Winning Counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 activates the V-attacker 2152 to open or close the prize even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) for opening the opening/closing winning port 2151 has not elapsed. Mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 . That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the big hit game state via the above-described second route.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 2155 . When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) detects a game ball passing through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V-attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 continues opening control of the V-attacker 2152 . That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning port 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route is executed. When it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the route, a round game is executed to shift the V attacker 2152 from the closed state to the open state. However, not limited to this, for example, when controlled to the big win game state through the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, a large winning opening A round game may be executed to move 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in an open state), the V winning opening and the big hit game The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating the "accessory open hit" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball enters the V prize opening provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. When entering, it is controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enters (passes through). A game ball that has passed through the loss port 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, when all the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is terminated without being continued. do.

V-shutter 2158 operates a V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61, which will be described later) to operate a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through V-winning opening 2155, and a game ball opening to V-winning opening 2155. A constant movement is always performed between the open mode in which the ball can (or easily) pass through. In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a cycle of 7000 msec, which repeats the operation of "6000 msec closed→1000 msec open→6000 msec closed".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155 and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 . A game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is ejected out of the machine through the loss port 2157 . Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged out of the machine through the loss port 2157.例文帳に追加

In addition, the locking member 2160 is released from the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown) after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated. The game ball that is unlocked in the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, it wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it passes through the losing opening 2157 . In addition, without providing the locking member 2160 , the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 .

(out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the big winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of those shot toward the game area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any of the machines to the outside of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 2178 described above, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general prize winning ports 2122, between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, etc. A game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 2100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and has a performance role group 2058 such as a movable role controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 61, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 61 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 61, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 for controlling the game and the effects according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300 , a payout/fire control circuit 2400 , and a power supply circuit 2450 .

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main CPU 2201 is connected with a main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like. The main CPU 2201 incorporates a WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202 .

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 2203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I/O port 2205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200 . For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display portion 2161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 2162, a first special symbol display portion 2163, a second special symbol display portion 2164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 2165, a 2 Special symbol reserved display portion 2166, general electric solenoid 2148, special electric solenoid 2135, V attacker solenoid 2154, and V shutter solenoid 2159 are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuitry 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205 .

Performance display data, set values, and the like are displayed on the performance display monitor 2170 under the control of the main CPU 2201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starter switch 2121, a second starter switch 2141, a pass gate switch 2127, a big prize draw count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V win drawer switch 2156, and a general switch. A winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205 .

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a hall computer 2186 which manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 2184, setting key 2174 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, and backup data stored in main RAM 2203 can be transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with an operation is connected. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. good too.

Also, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 corresponding to the case. When the notch is provided and the key managed by the person in charge of the game hall is used to rotate the pachinko game machine from the island facility to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 2176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 .

[3-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a character control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 2200 . Although not shown in FIG. 61, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302 . In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200 .

A work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 2301 .

A display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007 . The display control circuit 2304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data relating to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 2032 . The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 2032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 2032 .

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 2058). The role item control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a driving signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands transmitted from main control circuit 2200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. and a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180 . The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180 . The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180 . The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the clockwise rotation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450 . The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65, basic specifications of the third pachinko game machine will be described. The third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In addition, probability variation control is not performed in the 3rd pachinko game machine. In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, left-hand hitting is recommended in the normal game state, and right-hand hitting is recommended in the time-saving game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method in the display area of the display device 2007, for example.

[3-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 62 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the game ball wins (passes) through the first starting port 2120, in the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random number value, the lottery result is " It is determined as a "big hit" or "losing". In addition, when the game ball wins (passes) through the second starting port 2140, in the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol big hit determination random value, the lottery result is "big hit" or "role". It is determined by "per object release".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory hit" from being determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "accessory hit". , It is preferable that the second special symbol is determined only with a very low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") compared to the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential to avoid being determined to be "losing" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, but if it is determined to be "losing", "accessory open hit" It may be set to be higher than the probability determined by 1, or may be set to be lower than the probability determined by ``per chance to unlock the role item''.

In the special symbol win determination table stored in the main ROM 2202, data used in the first special symbol win determination process executed based on the winning to the first start port 2120 includes "big hit" or "losing". , and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judging a big hit and the judgment value data corresponding thereto (“big hit judgment value data”, “losing judgment value data”). In addition, as the data used for the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning to the second start port 2140, the big hit determination random value determined as "big hit" or "accessory open hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding determination value data (“jackpot determination value data”, “accessory release per determination value data”) is defined.

This third pachinko game machine does not have a function of changing the probability of a big win determined as a "big win", but this is not essential. It may be set so as to increase the probability of a big hit.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

If the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the winning probability of opening the role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning mouth 2155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled to the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 63 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the starting ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-described determination value data. ” and “symbol designating command” are referred to. The ``select symbol command at the time of winning'' is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of the winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbols is a big win. It is a command for designating the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 63, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 3, "z0" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 4 to 60, "z1" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 61 to 99, "z2" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is selected even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99. First, "zA2" is selected as the pattern designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command at the time of winning are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, "z3" is selected as the winning selection symbol command and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the accessor product open hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command at the time of winning are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 95, "z4" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 96 or 97, "z5" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 98 or 99, "z6" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

[3-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 64 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table includes the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot gaming state, the value of the time saving flag, the number of times of time saving, etc., according to the winning selection pattern command determined corresponding to the special pattern random number value. is referenced when determining the type of It should be noted that the remarks column in FIG. 64 is provided for convenience to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 64, for example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is "15", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the jackpot The number of times of time saving after the game state is determined to be "4".

It should be noted that the hit selection symbol commands "z4", "z5" and "z6" are used when the judgment value data is "accessory object open judgment value data" (that is, when the result of the special symbol In the case of an open hit), the V attacker 2152 is opened by the open hit, and the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is detected to control the jackpot game state. The number of rounds and the number of time reductions are stipulated. Therefore, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a winning hit, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the game ball is not controlled to the big win game state, the big win game state is entered. It is not controlled, and the number of time saving times defined in the jackpot type determination table in FIG. 64 is not set.

[3-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 65 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the third pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the column of "details of presentation" in FIG. 65 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determining fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 65, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 2120, and determines the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start port 2140. 2 Determine the variation pattern of the special design.

As shown in FIG. 65, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball enters the first starting port 2120 ( It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection obtained when passing).

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "losing", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol as the value of the time saving flag, the game ball entering the first start port 2120 (passing ) is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection obtained when the In addition, since it is recommended to hit to the right in the time-saving gaming state, it is considered that the game ball hardly enters the first start hole 2120 .

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the effect obtained when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. It is determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. A variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection acquired when the game ball wins at 2140.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role item open" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the variation time. is determined to be a very long long-fluctuation performance of, for example, 600000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball does not win (pass) to the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not always essential.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301 . The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201 .

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. In addition, the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 29, Fig. 76), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S2002), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S2002 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO in S2003), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S2004), the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S2004 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2005. to

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S2003 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process of Move to S2005.

At S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 2140 .

[3-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S2003 of the special symbol control process is determined as YES, and the first special symbol is processed when S2004 of the special symbol control process is determined as YES. It is subject to processing.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 67 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S2011).

When it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

At S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2013. It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes after S2013 based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

At S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The processing of this S2015 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. The processing of this S2016 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

At S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

At S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S2018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The process of S2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. The processing of this S2020 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 68, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S2021 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 62) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, if the second special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a prize release hit. In addition, in the hit determination process for the first special symbol, first, a process for determining whether or not the game is a big hit is performed. Similarly, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, first, a process for determining whether or not the game is a big hit is performed. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S2024.

At S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 63) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "win selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the kind of big win when the result of the special symbol win judging process is, for example, a big win or a prize release win. In this process, the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 64) is referred to, and the type of big win is determined according to the "hit selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). It should be noted that the type of jackpot determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, the winning of the opening of the role is determined by the passing of the game ball through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the opening of the role. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Also, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and prizes to be released, but the number of jackpots or prizes to be released may be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of jackpots and/or prizes to unlock, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65), for example, the type of special design, the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special design, the value of the time saving flag, the reach determination random number or / and effect selection A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

At S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

At S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

At S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

At S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S2030) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited section. It is preferable to use

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and changes the processing to special symbol management processing (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

At S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

At S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

At S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, you may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the probability variable remaining number and the time-saving remaining number. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is the process called at S2015 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 67). reference).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S2051), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

At S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S2052, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is not a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO determination in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating the winning of the accessory, and when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this processing, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 2131 (S2055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), game state designation parameter setting processing (S2058), and transmission reservation processing (S2059) of the big hit start display command. In addition, by performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a winning prize, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize.

In S2060, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol is a winning prize, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the winning prize (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2061. to

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the game control per release of the accessory. In this processing, a signal (for example, a winning signal for winning a prize) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting a winning winning prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing for setting a game state designation parameter (S2065). ), and transmission reservation processing (S2066) of the per-accessory-per-release start display command. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

At S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol game end processing is performed, the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 70) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first sets the special symbol control state number to "0" (S2071). Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2072.

At S2072, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2073). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2073, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) as described above.

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S2081), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S2081 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of times of opening as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to perform only one opening for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. , the first time may be opened for, for example, a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for, for example, a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns are provided within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total per opening of the role item, and among these multiple release patterns, for example, which one is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol Either one open pattern may be set. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

At S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, the process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

At S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the processing (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the V winning device opening control processing (see S2017 in FIG. 67) is performed after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation processing. will be performed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

At S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S2091), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S2091 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 61) for counting the number of winning game balls entering the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. be done. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won the V winning device 2150 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls winning the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when S2092 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 2151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 72) has passed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the open/close winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

At S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V prize detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not there is detection by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. It should be noted that the above specified time may be a time related to entry of the game ball into the interior of the V winning device 2150. The above specified time may be within a specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that a V prize has been detected (when S2095 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of V-per game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, a V hit signal, etc.) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61 for both) via the external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64). You can get a lot of prize balls as well. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-hit game control and the big-hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-hit game control can also be called the big-hit game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By carrying out this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, activation of the V attacker 2152), which is first executed based on the winning prize, is processed as the first round of the round game. That is, the V-per-game control executed by determining that there was a V winning prize detection (S2095 was determined YES) will be started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of operations of the V attacker 2152) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), and the V hit start display command transmission reservation process (S2103). In addition, by performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined at S2095 that no V winning has been detected (NO at S2095), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

At S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-9. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2018 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S2111 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

At S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. The round counter value (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 . After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

At S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S2113 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

At S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". In this way, by performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 67) is performed after the big win opening preparation process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

At S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S2116). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

At S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a big win, and the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived (S2052 in FIG. 70 is determined YES). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the jackpot 2131 is selected as the jackpot to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the winning prize, and the stop display mode indicating the opening of the prize is derived (YES determination in S2060 in FIG. 70), and V winning is detected (see FIG. 73 S2095 is determined YES), V winning device 2150 (that is, opening and closing winning opening 2151) is selected as a large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

At S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the large winning The number of winning balls and the like at the time of winning to the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

It should be noted that the "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened, out of the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

At S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

At S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, by performing the process (S2121) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 67) will be performed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

At S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

At S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-10. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the big winning hole opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when S2131 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61) that counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2131 or a V attacker count switch that counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 61) is the value of the maximum winning number. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2132), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2132 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2134. Move.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 74) has passed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has passed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134.

At S<b>2134 , the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 . After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

At S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed again. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

At S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO determination in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67). , the processing is returned to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 66). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (when S2141 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

At S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning mouth winning counter, etc.) Set the value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

At S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 66). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Extension example]
An expansion example common to the above-described first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine and third pachinko game machine will be described below. In addition, since the symbols attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following description, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third Codes are omitted unless the explanation is limited to the pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Extension example of variable probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is set to ON according to the type of jackpot, and if the variable probability flag is set to ON, the variable probability number is determined. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be adopted.

For example, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the big winning opening is passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, a big hit It may be a so-called V probability variation machine that sets the probability variation flag to ON at the end of the game control process. It should be noted that the specific area, for example, by operating the movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the open state in which the passage of the game ball is possible or easy, and the entry of the game ball is prohibited It can be displaced into a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variation machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the result is a big hit, the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process can be different.

FIG. 77 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example. A diagram showing when the open mode of the area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 77, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

In addition, although FIG. 77 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 77(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the big winning hole is open, except for a predetermined time after the start of the long opening of the big winning hole. It has become. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from when the short opening of the big winning opening is started until when the long opening of the big winning opening is finished. ing. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is set to ON very easily at the end of the big hit game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(C), in the third opening mode, during the short opening of the big winning opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning opening is started (these two times are both short openings). ), the specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even if one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening passes through the specific area, it can be either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, when the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability variation flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. set.

In addition, in FIG. 77, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have won the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area as an example of the opening mode of the specific area. , the first opening mode and the second opening mode are provided. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two modes. It is possible to use only one mode, or three or more modes.

In addition, in FIG. 77, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening, it is difficult to pass through the specific area. As an example of , the example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot, it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area. The mode is not limited, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 78 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 78, when the hit/lose determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second The winning selection symbol command of 2 special symbols is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. selected, with a selectivity of 50%, "z2" is selected. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. selected, with a selectivity of 35%, "z5" is selected.

FIG. 79 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C).

That is, according to the above FIGS. 77 to 79, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined to be the 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%, and 10%. 10R normal jackpot A is determined at a selection rate of 10R, and 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined at a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the type of the big win is determined to be the 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to have different probabilities of being set on.

It should be noted that, in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. 77(A) to (C). As shown in FIG. 80, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball into the big winning opening.

FIG. 80 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area (Example of control to be in an open state based on winning a prize in the mouth), when (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second It is a figure which shows when it is an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), in the first open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is opened, the first game ball enters the big winning hole, and the big winning hole is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, based on this detection, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. When the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the big winning hole is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 80(B), in the second open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is in the open state, the first game ball enters the big winning hole and wins a big prize. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the specific area remains until the winning hole is closed. does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, it is more difficult for even one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability changes at the end of the big hit game control process. Flag is set on.

It should be noted that, in the above, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the example in which the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but not limited to this, for example , When the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area. Although the example provided has been described, it is not limited to this, and for example, an open mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an open mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Although the example that can be determined to the difficult third mode has been described, it is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area is determined.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is opened twice during a short opening of the special winning opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special winning opening is started. Although it is in the open state for a short period of time (in both cases), if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the number of times the specific area is opened may be one or more times. There may be.

In addition, the specific area is closed according to the elapse of a predetermined opening time, the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or the specified number of big winning openings or winning in the specific area. and so on. Also, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variation control is executed (for example, high probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state, etc.) are a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until it is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is a game state in which probability variation control is not executed. (For example, normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is controlled. At this time, the loop count is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of times of the limiter may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, or determined by a predetermined lottery. In the case of a setting machine, the number of limiter times may be changed according to the set value.

It should be noted that, in the above, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the variable probability control is executed alternately until the limiter number of times is reached, the so-called limiter machine is repeatedly executed, but not limited to this, for example, the jackpot game state and , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be repeatedly executed alternately until the number of times of the limiter is reached. In particular, it is effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-described V probability variation machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the game state in which the probability variation control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, if the number of limiters is set to N times, for example, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, assuming that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, The game state after the jackpot game control process is finished is controlled to the game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, although it does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, the specific area is played during the execution of the big hit game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the big hit game control process is finished is controlled to a game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, etc.) in which probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are performed is controlled to a predetermined When the special symbol game of the number of times is performed, it may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a game state (for example, normal game state, time saving game state, etc.) in which variable probability control is not executed. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which variable probability control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "ST number") may be a fixed number of times, or may be different each time. In the case of a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may differ according to the set value. Furthermore, for example, it may be a so-called falling type game machine in which a falling lottery is performed and the variable probability control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery. , It may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the big hit game state.

[4-2. Extension example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big win, time saving control can be executed after the big win game control process is finished. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number out of the random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the starting hole (for example, a special symbol hit determination A random number value, a symbol random number value of a special symbol, etc.) may be used to perform a time-saving winning/losing determination process for determining whether or not to execute time-saving control separately from the special symbol winning determination process. When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, when performing a time-saving win-lose determination, for example, the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol random When it is a numerical value, it can be determined to be "time saving hit" in which time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time saving winning/losing determination processing separately from the special symbol winning determining processing, the time saving winning/losing determining processing may be executed prior to the special symbol winning determining processing in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving win-lose determination process, the random number for time-saving win-lose determination exclusively provided for the time-saving win-lose determination process is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving win-lose is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time saving winning/losing.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the start opening, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, It may be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a large prize winning opening or the like. Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process is provided, and based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area, for example, a random value that is used for the time-saving win-lose determination process is extracted. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special symbol winning/losing determination process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed during the variable display of the special symbols from which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the final display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcibly derive a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub CPU can grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit" or "time-saving loss" by appearance or easy effect image (for example, variable effect of decorative pattern or character It is preferable to execute control to display a display effect by ) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving win" or "time-saving loss" by appearance, time-saving win-lose determination A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variable effect of decorative patterns, a display effect by characters, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss". You may execute the control displayed in the . In this case, interest can be maintained until the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a game ball shooting method recommended in the big win game state. It is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit", the sub CPU, when the time saving control is executed Control is performed so that an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball shooting method is displayed on the display device. However, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", the effect image showing the method of shooting the game ball recommended when the time-saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on the "time reduction hit" is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), etc., it is not displayed. You may do so. In addition, said specific condition is not restricted to what makes a condition the number of times of time saving, It can be set as arbitrary conditions suitably.

In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed before the special symbol winning determination process is executed, the sub CPU is under the condition of "time-saving hit" (that is, the time-saving flag is set to ON). Whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed may be controlled to display a performance image that can be grasped from the appearance or is easily grasped on the display device.

In addition, the type of random number used in the time saving judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time saving judgment process, the condition to be determined as time saving in the time saving judgment process, the execution timing of the time saving judgment process, the time saving judgment process can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the time-saving number of times set at the time of the time-saving hit, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the time-saving number of times, the time-saving hit probability, and the time-saving judgment Processing related to time saving, such as processing result display, is summarized below.

(Types of random numbers used for time-saving hit-loss judgment processing)
The random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process are, for example, random numbers for special symbol per determination, random numbers for special symbol determination, random numbers for normal hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for special symbol fall determination, and It may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers such as a dedicated time-saving hit-or-lose determination random number. Moreover, if it is a setting machine, when changing the setting, the time saving win-lose determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used for the time saving judgment process is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving judgment random number value), but multiple types of random number values (for example, the special symbol per judgment random number value and the random number value for design determination ) may be used for determination.

(Timing of extracting random numbers used for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extracting the random number used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is when the game ball enters the starting port, which triggers the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit determination process. It may be any timing, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving hit-or-lose determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process may be performed based on the winning of a specific prize winning opening where prize balls are dispensed, or a specific gate or specific out where no prize balls are dispensed. It may also be based on passage through the mouth or the like.

It should be noted that, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the start opening, the game ball wins either the first start opening or the second start opening. Even if there is, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted, or only when the game ball wins in any one of the specific start openings, the time saving win-lose determination random number may be extracted.

(Conditions that are determined to be time-saving in the time-saving hit/loss determination process)
When performing time saving judgment processing using the extracted random number for time saving judgment processing, the extracted random number for time saving judgment judgment is a specific random number for time saving judgment judgment (for example, specific time saving judgment value data). It is good to make it determined that it is a time-saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving hit-loss determination process using the random number value for special symbol hit determination, when it is specific loss determination value data, specific small hit determination value data or / and specific big hit determination value data, time saving It is preferable to make it judged as a hit. In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving hit is determined when it is a specific losing symbol, a specific small winning symbol, or a specific big winning symbol. . Also, when the time-saving hit-loss determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random number value, it may be determined that the time-saving hit is determined when the random number data for the special symbol fall determination is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time saving win-lose determination process using the setting value after the change, it is good to be determined to be a time saving hit when it is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case of performing time-saving winning/losing determination processing using random numbers for normal hit determination and random numbers for determining normal symbols. Furthermore, the conditions for determining that the time-saving win-lose determination process is not limited to the above conditions, can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving hit", the result of the special symbol winning determination process (see S2023 in FIG. And when the game ball entering the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 2152 is opened, whether or not the time saving control is executed and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of the opening of the accessory. It is better to Then, the jackpot game control process is executed without detecting the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the accession hit and the V attacker 2152 has opened. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time saving control and the number of times of time saving based on the "time saving win" if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". However, the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving loss", the result of the special symbol winning determination process is the opening hit, and the game ball entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens. does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
When executing the time-saving win-lose determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the time-saving win-lose determination random number obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting port, the main CPU provides the start information of the special symbol. In the same way, it is better to reserve the random number value for the time saving judgment that was obtained.

In addition, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win-lose determination process immediately after extracting the random number to be used for the time-saving win-lose determination process (for example, before being suspended), or suspend the extracted random number, The time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state that can execute time-saving win-lose determination processing)
The time-saving hit/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or the game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). Also, for example, the conditions for executing the time-saving win-lose determination process, such as executing the time-saving win-lose determination process in any game state or executing the time-saving win-lose determination process only in a specific game state, are determined in advance. It may be so that the time-saving win-lose determination process is executed when the conditions are satisfied.

(Aspect of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and when time-saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to ON. In this case, when the 1st time saving flag is set to ON, and when the 2nd time saving flag is set to ON, it is good to perform time saving control with a different function. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both special figure shortening control and electric sapo control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, special figure shortening control and electric sapo Only one of the controls can be performed. Also, when the first time saving flag is set to ON, control to the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, and the second time saving flag is turned on If it is set to , it may be controlled to the second time-saving game state in which only the electric sapo control is performed out of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags to set on is not limited to the above, for example, it may be determined based on the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is executed It may be determined according to the game state when it is played.

(Time saving number of times set at time saving hit)
It is preferable that the number of times of time saving set when the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" is determined according to the game state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, not limited to this, for example, if a plurality of time saving hit-or-loss judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the number of time saving times to be set to the game state when the time saving hit-or-fall judgment process is performed Instead or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination. For example, if the random number value for time saving hit/loss determination extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first time saving hit determination value data, the number of time saving times is determined to be "100", and the second time saving is determined. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of times of time saving to be "50".

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may newly set the number of times of time saving determined based on the 'time saving hit' instead of the remaining number of times of saving time (that is, reset the remaining number of times of saving time). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of times of saving time is greater or less than the remaining number of times of saving time, and the range of game characteristics is expanded, and the time saving game state with the time saving flag turned on is interesting. It is possible to make it have and increase interest.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction win" to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of times of time saving does not become less than the current remaining number of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the game state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit ”, the main CPU replaces the number of times of time saving determined based on the “time saving hit” with the remaining number of times of time saving and newly sets the number of time saving times determined based on the “time saving hit”. Among the processing to be added to the number of times, any one may be determined in advance, and the number of times of shortening working hours may be set in a mode that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine that performs time saving control with different functions when the first time saving flag is set on and when the second time saving flag is set on, time saving win-lose determination processing If the result is "time saving hit", the main CPU, the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are time saving control of the same function and time saving of different functions You may make it change the process which sets the number of times of time saving with the case of control. For example, if the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function of time saving control, the number of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" to the remaining number of time saving In addition, if the time saving control that is executed based on the time saving control being executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" is a time saving control with a different function, instead of the time saving remaining number of times that is being executed, based on the "time saving hit" You may make it newly set the number of times of time saving determined by (that is, reset the remaining number of times of time saving). In addition, if the time-saving control that is executed based on the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control that is executed based on the "time-saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time-saving times during execution are consumed, time-saving based on the "time-saving hit" You may make it perform control.

In addition, when the number of times of time saving is set based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "hit", the number of times of time saving may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time saving to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set to ON even though the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit". In addition, when the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process performed during the execution of the time-saving control is 'time-saving win' and the number of times of time-saving is set to '0', the time-saving control being executed is terminated.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is the special symbol winning determination process in the same frame. If performed earlier, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, invalidate the "time-saving hit" (based on "time-saving hit" It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set to ON based on the winning time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to ON depending on the type of big win).

Moreover, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving winning" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, in the same frame, if the time saving hit/loss determination process is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination process, based on the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process, immediately (before the special symbol hit determination process is performed) even if the time saving control is started. good. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number used for the time saving judgment process and the execution of the time saving judgment process, and it is possible to enhance the interest becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win-lose determination process becomes "time saving hit", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU executes the fanning effect of whether or not the time saving control is started, It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the fact that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends Based on, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the big hit. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a per access (a per access for opening the time saving control) and when the V attacker 2152 opens, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 Also when big-hit game control is performed by having detected, it is good to start time saving control based on the end of big-hit game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the role release hit Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU is based on the closure of the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the time saving based on the "time saving winning". It is good to start controlling.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the set number of time saving times", "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed , When it is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or "When the number of times of time reduction is set to 0 times even though the result of the time reduction hit/loss determination process was a time reduction hit" etc. is.

In addition, in the game state in which the time saving control is executed, if the small hitting game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control continues to be executed even after the small hitting game control process ends be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, during the execution of the time saving control, the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by deriving a stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a prize open hit. However, when the V-attacker 2152 is opened, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control processing is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to operate even after the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Continue to implement time saving control.

(Time-saving number of rewrites)
In the game state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving game state, time-saving game state, etc.) in which time-saving control is executed, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, and when the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination processing is "time-saving hit", the main CPU , You may rewrite the number of times of working hours, and do not rewrite the number of times of working hours (that is, to execute the time saving control until the number of times of working time saving control is digested).

In addition, when rewriting the number of times of time saving, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of times of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" at the time when the number of times of time saving in the time saving control being executed is consumed, It may be set at the time of execution of the special design hit determination process, it may be set at the time of starting or stopping the variable display of the special design, it may be set at the time of the time saving success determination process, and it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving hit-loss determination processing, the time saving number of times determined based on the "time saving hit" will be overwritten to the time saving number of times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, one of "rewrite the number of time saving" and "add to the previous number of time saving" may be determined in advance, and the number of time saving may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Probability of time saving)
When the time reduction win-lose determination processing is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port or the second start port, the time reduction win-lose determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port (hereinafter referred to as "the 1 time reduction hit/loss determination process") and time reduction hit/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time reduction hit/loss determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port, the time reduction hit probability may be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed, or the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when it is done, or when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed and the second time saving win/loss determination process The time saving hit probability may be the same or almost the same probability as in the case where is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win-lose judgment processing)
A time saving judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time saving judgment process (whether it is a time saving hit or a time saving loss) or / and the time saving number determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process (time saving hit) A win-time reduction number display unit for displaying may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section may be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section and the like, and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU, for example, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, even if it displays the number of times of time saving determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process and / and the time saving hit. good.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, It may be longer than the interval time when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of decorative patterns is synchronized with the variable display of special patterns, in this case, the sub-CPU displays, for example, the liquid crystal It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the winning of the opening of the role and the big winning game control process is not executed based on the opening of the role, the main CPU 2201 performs the time saving winning/losing. When the result of the judgment process is "time saving win", the interval time after the action for opening the accessory is longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving win-lose judgment process is "time saving loss". may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and offer benefits (for example, prizes) based on the results of the games. (balls, prize data, etc.) can be applied to all types of gaming machines. In other words, a game is played by shooting or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by physical actions of the player, and the game media are paid out based on the results of the game. Alternatively, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media owned by the player and enable a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, the game media held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game media management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game media.

In the case of a gaming machine in which a game is played by circulating enclosed game balls, the game balls as game media are not discharged to the outside so that the game can be played. Prize ball data as a game medium is provided instead. In this specification, "game value to be paid out" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, when the player wins a winning slot with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is provided in the case of an enclosed game machine. Also, the game value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media management device connected to the main control circuit manages, the game media management device is a device provided in the gaming machine having ROM and RWM (or RAM), and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to a game medium handling device and a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media for the game medium lending operation (that is, when the player performs the game medium insertion operation). or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media is won (that winning combination is established) (Acquisition action), or an action of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media, the owned game medium management device displays the number of owned game media on the front of the pachinko machine. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game medium number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to being directly operated by the player, it has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between it and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with lending operation means, return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (e.g. IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the game media handling device may be provided (neither is shown).

As the game flow at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value based on the operation of one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted value are increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is sent from the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, and the game media possessed by the player are sent. It is good also as dividing and processing. In addition, it is also possible to eject cash or a cash equivalent instead of just ejecting the recording medium, or to store the information in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted, and the member recording medium is stored so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), it is possible to execute a lock operation to lock the game medium or valuable value data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In the above description, the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, but the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine using game balls, or a sealed game machine. It can also be provided so that the game media of the player can be managed.

Thus, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. can be reduced, the player can be prevented from directly contacting the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through game media or through the slot for inserting or paying out game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed type game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and a communication cable for transmitting data related to the increase or decrease in the game medium associated with consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected to enable transmission and reception by optical signals via a game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed type game machine, the shooting device is positioned above the game area and shoots game balls as game media from above to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the waiting state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Also, a subtraction sensor is provided on the route from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of possessed balls. In this way, since game balls as game media are shot from above into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in enclosed type game machines. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the shooting device. Game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed type game machine, and a fixed number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. In addition, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine and a take-in mechanism for taking in the game balls polished outside the game machine are provided without providing a ball polishing device. good too. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the game area.

Since game balls are not ejected to the outside of the game machine, enclosed type game machines are not provided with an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the closed-type game machine, the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the game is played. In an enclosed type game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a ball by lending it from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. As game balls are shot from the shooting device, the balls in the player's possession are consumed, and the number of balls in the player's possession decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through the respective prize winning openings provided in the game area, the number of payouts according to the conditions set according to the winning openings is performed, and the number of possessed balls is increased. Furthermore, the number of balls in possession is increased by lending out from the game medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game is over, all the game values (that is, the balls in possession) stored in the enclosed gaming machine are cleared, or some of the balls in possession are transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls is reduced. . Furthermore, a game machine of the type in which game balls are shot from above the game area does not have the concept of foul balls. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine that shoots game balls from below, the number of held balls increases or decreases depending on the presence or absence of foul balls. It should be noted that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates consumption, lending, and payout of held balls. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending, or payout. Also, "data on increase/decrease in game media associated with consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on decrease in possessed balls due to shooting game balls and increase in possessed balls due to lending and payout.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of game balls through the winning openings. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is shot, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held by the player to the game medium management device. The liquid crystal display device is positioned above the gaming machine and receives requests for conversion of game value managed by the game medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. These requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls in possession. Here, the "game value" includes money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. Note that in the second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted number of balls in hand can be used for prize exchanges and the like in a game arcade where the game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. In addition, this backup power supply may be used to continuously detect opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the game machine when the power is turned on.

It should be noted that the enclosed type game machine only needs to be configured so that the player cannot touch the game balls, for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the game machine without circulating the game balls in the island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate in the island facility but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed game machines.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, the game This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

In this manner, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determines whether or not they are the same. It is possible to confirm that the message has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section for modulating a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation section is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to have a demodulator for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission/reception signal between the game machine and the game media management device is read, it is difficult to decipher the signal. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission signal is received from the transmission source, the transmission destination transmits an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible not only to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game media management device, and the main control circuit and the game media management device are connected via the frame control circuit. A communication connection may be established with the game media management device. Also, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game media management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpot symbols. Take action to prevent it from happening.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the other symbol is displayed. The special symbols are forcibly stopped with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a big hit symbol, the state is shifted from the general game state to the big win game state as described above. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game is executed. Based on the transition from the state to the small winning game state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning pattern), the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning game state to the general game state ( Based on the end of the small winning game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning pattern, the general game state shifts to the small winning game state as described above. None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are being performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU is under variable display. As for the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the group of LEDs is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the clocking of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[5. Fourth pachinko machine]
Next, the fourth pachinko game machine will be explained. As for the fourth pachinko game machine, mainly the differences from the third pachinko game machine will be explained.

The external configuration and mechanical configuration of the fourth pachinko gaming machine are the same as the mechanical configuration and electrical configuration of the third pachinko gaming machine. Therefore, the fourth pachinko game machine will be described by citing the mechanical configuration and electrical configuration of the third pachinko game machine. Although the third pachinko machine has been described as a sequential variation machine, the fourth pachinko machine is a preferential variation in which the starting condition for the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol. machine.

Note that the first special symbol display portion 2163 and the second special symbol display portion 2164 (see FIG. 61) in the fourth pachinko game machine constitute a variable display portion capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information. The main RAM 2203 (see FIG. 61) in the fourth pachinko game machine is hold information capable of storing hold information for holding the display results derived by the first special symbol display unit 2163 and the second special symbol display unit 2164. Configure storage means.

[5-1. Game flow]
With reference to FIG. 81, the game flow of this pachinko gaming machine will be described. In this pachinko game machine, when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the first special symbol win determination process or the second special symbol win determination process is "big win" is derived, the game state shifts to the big win game state. .

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol winning determination processing does not become a stop display mode indicating that it is a "minor winning". That is, in this pachinko gaming machine, there is no "small hit" by the first special symbol.

In this pachinko game machine, the V attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the second special symbol winning determination process is a "minor winning" (hereinafter also referred to as a "accessory winning"). Then, when the game ball entering the opened V-attacker wins the V-winning hole in the V-attacker, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game state ends, the game state shifts to the time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state in the fourth pachinko game machine, compared with the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened more than the normal game state (see FIG. 65), and the normal electric shutter for the normal electric accessory is used. (Refer to FIG. 61) By making the opening time relatively longer, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140 (Refer to FIG. 61).

In this pachinko gaming machine, there are a first stop display mode and a second stop display mode as the stop display modes of the first special symbol that shifts from the normal game state to the jackpot game state. When it is determined to shift from the normal game state to the jackpot game state, the probability that the first stop display mode is selected as the stop display mode of the first special symbol is higher than the probability that the second stop display mode is selected. is also expensive.

For example, when it is determined to shift from the normal game state to the jackpot game state, the probability that the first stop display mode is selected as the stop display mode of the first special symbol is 99%, and the second stop display mode is 99%. is selected is 1%.

After the jackpot game state ("special figure 1 jackpot (99%)" in FIG. 81) that has shifted due to the derivation of the first stop display mode in the first special symbol is completed, 9 fluctuations (time reduction 5 fluctuations + Remaining hold 4 fluctuations) to the time-saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "normal time-saving game state"). When shifting to the normal time-saving game state, the production state (production mode) shifts to the art run mode.

After the jackpot game state (“special figure 1 jackpot (1%)” in FIG. 81) that has shifted due to the derivation of the second stop display mode in the first special symbol is completed, or the ceiling condition described later is established. When (in FIG. 81, "ceiling reached"), the time-saving game state over 23 variations (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special time-saving game state") is shifted to.

When shifting to the special time-saving game state, the production state shifts to the immediate continuous mode over 8 variations, and then shifts to the charge mode over 15 variations (11 variations in time reduction + 4 variations in remaining hold). In addition, in the special time-saving game state, the production state (production mode) may shift to the immediate continuous mode after shifting to the charge mode.

In the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state, the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a "big hit", and the stop display mode is derived. 2 jackpot"), or after the jackpot game state ("V prize jackpot" in FIG. 81) shifted by the game ball entering the V prize opening in the V attacker ends, the game state returns to the special time-saving Move to game state. Therefore, the production state shifts to the immediate continuous mode.

In this way, the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) in the fourth pachinko gaming machine has a plurality of games including a normal game state, a time-saving game state (specific game state), and a jackpot game state (special game state). A game state transition means capable of transitioning the game state between states is constituted.

[5-1-1. Ceiling conditions]
The time-saving game state in this pachinko game machine is a general time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as “A time-saving”) that transitions after the jackpot game state ends, and the number of fluctuations at low probability has become the number of operations n. It also serves as a time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as “B time-saving”) that is activated based on the fact.

In this pachinko game machine, when the number of times of operation reaches n in the normal game state, the game state shifts to a special time-saving game state as B time reduction, and the presentation state shifts to a direct mode.

The number of fluctuations related to the number of times of operation n is always counted if it is in a low probability regardless of whether it is in the time saving game state. In this pachinko game machine, the number of operations n is set to 959.

In addition, the number of times of operation n is not limited to this, and if it is set within the range of "2.5/ML ≤ n ≤ 3.0/ML" for the jackpot probability (ML) in the setting with the lowest jackpot probability Therefore, the number of operations n may be set to 750 or the like. Also, ML corresponds to the reciprocal of the probability of winning the "jackpot".

The number of variations associated with the number of operations n is reset when the RAM is cleared, when the RAM is cleared by a setting change, and when the conditional device is activated or terminated. In this pachinko game machine, when the initial setting process (see FIG. 17) is executed at startup and when the jackpot game state ends, the number of fluctuations related to the number of operations n is reset.

In addition, the number of fluctuations related to the number of times of operation n is counted by adding up the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In this pachinko game machine, 23 is set as the number of times N of time saving of B time saving. Not limited to this, the number of times N of time saving may be set to be within the range of "N≦3.8/ML", so the number of times such as 150 times may be set. In addition, this pachinko game machine is equipped with only 1 number of times N of time reduction. Other B time saving end conditions are the same as A time saving.

In the time-saving game, the pachinko game machine makes the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery the same as that of the normal game state, shortens the variation time of the second special symbol than that of the normal game state (see FIG. 85), and uses the normal electric accessory. By making the opening time of the general electric shutter (see FIG. 61) longer than the normal game state, the time-saving game state is substantially realized.

In other words, in the normal game state, the variation time of the normal symbols is set to be long and the opening time of the normal electric accessory is set to be extremely short, so that the game ball can be delivered to the normal electric accessory without making a difference in the probability of winning the normal symbols. configured to be restrained. On the other hand, in the time-saving game, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and setting the opening time of the normal electric role longer, the game ball wins the normal electric role without making a difference in the probability of winning the normal pattern. is configured to facilitate

It should be noted that only the normal time-saving game state may be made high probability, and the normal pattern probability of the special time-saving game state may be the same as the normal game state. In addition, the normal pattern probability may be set to be the same as the normal game state only in the time saving state shifted via the B time saving state, and the normal pattern probability of the time saving state shifted via the big hit may be set to a high probability.

When the number of times of operation reaches n, there is no need to display a dedicated pattern as a special pattern, and when the number of times of operation reaches n, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is "losing", the pattern corresponding to "losing" is displayed. , If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the symbol corresponding to "small hit" may be displayed.

For example, in FIG. 5, when the result of the first special symbol winning determination process is "jackpot", three LEDs of the first special symbol display LED group 163a are turned on, the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol is When the result of the hit determination process is "small win", the two LEDs of the first special symbol display LED group 163a are lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lost". It is assumed that one LED of the first special symbol display LED group 163a lights up and the other LEDs go out.

In this case, when the operation count n is reached, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "losing", one LED of the first special symbol display LED group 163a is lit, and the other LEDs are extinguished. Also, when the operation count n is reached, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", two LEDs of the first special symbol display LED group 163a are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off.

That is, the first special symbol display LED group 163a does not light up in a lighting mode indicating that the number of times of operation n is reached when the number of times of operation n is reached.

As for the variation pattern when the number of times of operation n is reached, a dedicated variation pattern is selected only in the variation pattern table selected after winning. When a small win is won when the number of operations n is reached, both the time-saving game state and the small win game state are operated.

That is, when the number of times of operation reaches n, it becomes possible to provide a predetermined game value based on the occurrence of the small winning game state, and after the small winning game state ends, the game is more advantageous than the normal game state. Since it is possible to shift to the time-saving game state, it is possible to provide a game machine with a new game property that has never existed before.

[5-2. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 87, basic specifications of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. The fourth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

[5-2-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 82 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the game ball wins (passes) through the first starting port 2120, in the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol big hit determination random number value, the lottery result is " It is determined as a "big hit" or "losing".

When the game ball wins (passes through) the second start port 2140, in the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol big hit determination random number value, the lottery result is "big hit", "accessory open It is determined as "hit" or "losing".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory hit" from being determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "accessory hit". , It is preferable that the second special symbol is determined only with a very low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") compared to the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. Further, when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, it may not be determined as "losing".

In the special symbol win determination table stored in the main ROM 2202, data used in the first special symbol win determination process executed based on the winning to the first start port 2120 includes "big hit" or "losing". , and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judging a big hit and the judgment value data corresponding thereto (“big hit judgment value data”, “losing judgment value data”).

In addition, as the data used for the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning to the second start port 2140, the big hit determination determined as "big hit", "accessory open hit" or "losing" The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value and the corresponding judgment value data (“jackpot judgment value data”, “accessory winning judgment value data”, “losing judgment value data”) is defined.

Although this fourth pachinko game machine does not have a function of changing the probability of a big win determined as a "big win", this is not essential. It may be set so as to increase the probability of a big hit.

Further, in this fourth pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

If the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory may be set higher at high settings than at low settings.

In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the winning probability of opening the role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value.

That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning mouth 2155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled to the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[5-2-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 83 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the starting ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-described determination value data. ” and “symbol designating command” are referred to.

The ``select symbol command at the time of winning'' is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of the winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbols is a big win. It is a command for designating the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 83, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. selected.

That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0, "z0" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 1 to 99, "z1" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is selected even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99. First, "zA2" is selected as the pattern designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command at the time of winning are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 39, "z2" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 40 to 99, "z3" is selected as the winning selection symbol command and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the accessor product open hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command at the time of winning are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 29, "z4" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 30 to 49, "z5" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 50 to 99, "z6" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is selected even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99. First, "zA7" is selected as the pattern designation command.

[5-2-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 84 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table includes the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot gaming state and a time-saving flag indicating whether or not the time-saving state is set according to the winning-time selection pattern command determined corresponding to the special pattern random number value. It is referred to when determining the type of jackpot, such as the value and the number of times of time saving. It should be noted that the remarks column in FIG. 84 is provided for convenience to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 84, for example, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is "6", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the jackpot The number of times of time saving after the game state is determined to be "9".

It should be noted that the hit selection symbol commands "z4", "z5" and "z6" are used when the judgment value data is "accessory object open judgment value data" (that is, when the result of the special symbol In the case of an open hit), the V attacker 2152 is opened by the open hit, and the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is detected to control the jackpot game state. The number of rounds and the number of time reductions are stipulated. Therefore, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the hit of the accessory release, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the game ball is not controlled to the big hit game state, it is described in the remarks column. 84 is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and the number of times of time reduction defined in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 84 is not set.

In addition, when the reserved information of the second special symbol remains in the reserved information storage means before the "accessory release hit", only the remaining reserved information corresponds to the immediately connected mode or the charge mode described later. Execute the production to do.

[5-2-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 85 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the column of "details of effect" in FIG. 85 is shown for the sake of convenience.

The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start port 2140. do. Thus, the main CPU 2201 constitutes variation pattern selection means.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the first starting port 2120 when the game ball wins ( It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection obtained when passing).

In addition, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is "losing", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the value of the time saving flag, the time saving table number, and the game ball at the first start port 2120. is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection obtained when wins (passes).

The time saving table number is referred to when the value of the time saving flag is "1". That is, the time saving table number is not referred to when the value of the time saving flag is "0". In addition, since it is recommended to hit to the right in the time-saving gaming state, it is considered that the game ball hardly enters the first start hole 2120 .

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the effect obtained when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. It is determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is “per hit for opening the role” and the value of the time saving flag is “1”, the main CPU 2201 determines the time saving table number, the game ball is in the second start port 2140 A variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection acquired when winning a prize.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role item open" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the variation time. is determined to be a very long long-fluctuation performance of, for example, 600000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball does not win (pass) to the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the player even if the game ball wins, but this is not always essential.

In addition, as a method of minimizing the profit that can be given to the player due to the variation of the second special symbol during the normal game state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time. It is not limited to this.

For example, by setting the opening time of the V attacker 2152 to be opened when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role item" to an extremely short time, substantially the V attacker 2152 It may be set so as to make winning of game balls difficult. Moreover, both the method of lengthening the fluctuation time and the method of shortening the release time of the V attacker 2152 may be used.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "losing" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the time saving table number, the It is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection acquired when the game ball wins (passes) the second start port 2140 .

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "losing" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "per hit". The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol to be a long variation effect with an extremely long variation time of, for example, 600000 msec.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301 . The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007, the sound effect output from the speaker 2032, and the light emission effect by the LED group 2046 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201. .

In the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 85, the time saving table number 0 is selected in the normal time saving game state, and one of the time saving table numbers 1 to 5 is selected in the special time saving game state.

The variation pattern table corresponding to the time saving flag value of "0" corresponds to the normal variation pattern table in the present invention. The variation pattern table corresponding to the time saving table numbers 1 to 5 corresponds to the specific variation pattern table in the present invention.

The variation pattern table corresponding to the time saving table numbers 1 and 2 corresponds to the first specific variation pattern table in the present invention. The variation pattern table corresponding to the time saving table numbers 3 to 5 corresponds to the second specific variation pattern table in the present invention. The variation patterns of the time saving table numbers 1 to 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG.

In the time saving game state, the main CPU 2201 selects a time saving table number according to the game state. For example, the main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number 0 if the game state is the normal time saving game state.

Further, if the gaming state is the special time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 selects one of the time-saving table numbers 1 to 5 according to the number of games in the special time-saving gaming state.

In addition, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the variation pattern corresponding to the time saving table numbers 1 to 2 is selected when the production state is the immediate continuous mode (see FIG. 81), and the time saving table number 3 A variation pattern corresponding to 1 to 5 is selected when the effect state is the charge mode (see FIG. 81).

As shown in FIG. 86, in the special time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 selects a time-saving table number according to the variation pattern table selection table.

In FIG. 86, the main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number 1 from the 1st to 7th variations of the special symbols. From the 1st to the 7th variations, the effect state is the Sokuren mode (see FIG. 81).

The main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number 2 on the eighth variation of the special symbol. The eighth variation is the final variation of the Sokuren mode (see FIG. 81). Here, the sub CPU 2301 executes an effect state transition effect, which will be described later, indicating a transition from the immediate continuous mode to the charge mode when the eighth variation in the immediate continuous mode is "losing".

In addition, the time-saving table number 1 tends to select a variation pattern with a relatively shorter variation time than the time-saving table number 2 . However, in the case of the time saving table number 1, when the winning result of the special symbol is "big win" or "accessory release win", a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the time saving table number 2 may be selected.

The main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number 3 for the 9th variation of the special symbols, and selects the time saving table number 4 for the 10th to 13th variation of the special symbols.

The main CPU 2201 selects the time saving table number such that the same pattern as the 9th to 13th special symbol variations is repeated from the 14th to 18th special symbol variations. Incidentally, from the 9th to the 18th variation of the special symbol, the effect state corresponds to the first set and the second set in the charge mode (see FIG. 81).

The main CPU 2201 selects time saving table number 5 for the 19th variation of the special symbol, and selects time saving table number 4 for the 20th to 23rd variation of the special symbol.

Here, if all of the 19th to 23rd variations in the charge mode are "losing", the sub CPU 2301 displays a result screen indicating transition from the charge mode to the normal game state. From the 19th to the 23rd variations of the special symbols, the effect state corresponds to the third set in the charge mode (see FIG. 81).

For time saving table number 4, a variation pattern with a relatively shorter variation time than for time saving table number 5 is likely to be selected. However, in the case of the time saving table number 4, when the winning result of the special symbol is "big win" or "accessory release win", a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the time saving table number 5 may be selected.

FIG. 87 shows an example of variable time when a time saving table number is selected according to the variable pattern table selection table shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 87, the width of each rectangle represents the variation time in each variation from the 1st variation to the 23rd variation of the special symbol.

[Modified example of variable time in special time saving game state]
As an example of the fluctuation time of the special time-saving game state in FIG. 87, the time-saving table number shown in FIG. , the selection of the variation pattern is not limited to this (see FIG. 85).

As shown in FIG. 85, as the variation time when the time reduction table number is 4, when the hit result of the special symbol indicates "losing", a variation pattern with a short variation time of 100 ms or 200 ms is selected as the variation time. be done.

In addition, as the fluctuation time when the time saving table number is 4, when the hit result of the special symbol indicates "big hit" or "accessory hit", a medium fluctuation time of 1000 ms or 3000 ms is selected as the fluctuation time. .

In addition, as for the variation time when the time saving table number is 3 or 5, a variation pattern of 50000 ms or more at the shortest is selected regardless of the winning result of the special symbol.

In other words, as the fluctuation time when the time saving table number is 4, the fluctuation time when the hit result of the special pattern indicates "big hit" or "accessory hit" is "loss" when the time saving table number is 4 A variation pattern with a longer variation time than the case is selected, and is set to be always shorter than the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected when the time saving table number is 3 or 5.

In this way, the number of fluctuations in the special time-saving gaming state is 10 to 13, and 15 to 18, and since it is possible to diversify the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performed in the 20 to 23 times, one fluctuation Since it is possible to reduce the feeling of boredom caused by repeating monotonous fluctuations over time, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

[5-3. Main control processing]
Various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are partly different between the fourth pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, but other processes are the same.

Therefore, hereinafter, various processes different from those of the third pachinko game machine will be described, and description of other processes will be omitted. In the various processes in the fourth pachinko game machine, there are some processes that are the same as the processes performed in the third pachinko game machine. , will be explained again with the step numbers changed.

[5-3-1. Special symbol variable display start processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing special symbol variable display start processing in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called at S2013 (see FIG. 67) during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

First, in S3001, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0". In addition, the control state number of the special symbol is set to "0" when the special symbol game of 1 is completed and the next special symbol game can be executed (see FIG. 71). .

If it is determined in S3001 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S3001), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3001 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S3001), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3002.

In S3002, the main CPU 2201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S3002, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 82) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, if the second special symbol is the object to be processed, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a prize release hit or a loss.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the first special symbol, first, a process for determining whether or not the game is a big hit is performed. Similarly, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that it is not a big hit in this process, a determination process of whether or not there is a prize open hit is performed. If it is determined in this process that it is not a winning combination, it is determined to be a loss. After executing the process of S3003, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3004.

At S3004, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S3003).

In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 83) is referred to, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "hit selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command". After executing the process of S3004, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3005.

In S3005, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the kind of big win when the result of the special symbol win judging process is, for example, a big win or a prize release win.

In this process, the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 84) is referred to, and the type of big hit is determined according to the "hit selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S3004). It should be noted that the type of jackpot determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, the winning of the opening of the role is determined by the passing of the game ball through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the opening of the role. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed.

Also, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and prizes to be released, but the number of jackpots or prizes to be released may be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of jackpots and/or prizes to unlock, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process of S3005, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. The details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S3006, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, when the variation time is added by the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S3006), the variation time added by the special symbol variation pattern determination process is determined as the special symbol variation time. When the variation time is not added by the symbol variation pattern determination processing, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85) is referred to, and the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the special symbol variation pattern determination processing (S3006) Time is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S3007, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3008.

At S3008, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S3008, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3009, the main CPU 2201 performs game state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S3009, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3010.

At S3010, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this processing, mainly update processing of various flags (for example, a time saving flag, etc.) relating to management of the game state is performed. After executing the process of S3010, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S3011.

At S3011, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S3010) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S3011)) within the interrupt prohibited section. It is preferable to use

[5-3-2. Special Symbol Variation Pattern Decision Processing]
FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

First, in S3021, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the gaming state is B time saving. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is time to rush into the B time saving.

Here, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations related to the number of operations n has reached a specified number. Specifically, the main CPU 2201 determines that the game state is in the B time-saving entry when the value of the above-described symbol confirmation number counter (see FIG. 69) is a predetermined number (960), and the symbol confirmation number counter If the value is not the predetermined number (960), it is determined that the gaming state is not the time of B rushing.

In this pachinko machine, the fixed pattern number counter continues to count even after the next variation without being reset regardless of whether the number of variations reaches the specified number or when the number of variations does not reach the specified number. do. The number-of-determined-patterns counter is configured to be reset at the timing of the start or end of the big win, or at the timing of RAM clearing.

The value of the pattern fixed number counter is always counted at the end of the variation if the probability is low. It should be noted that the counting of the fixed symbol number counter value is not limited to the end of variation, and may be counted at the start of variation.

In S3021, when it is determined that it is time to rush into B (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3022. In S3021, when it is determined that it is not time to rush into B (NO), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3023.

In S<b>3022 , the main CPU 2201 sets 1 to a special flag indicating whether or not it is time for the B rush. It should be noted that the special flag is reset to 0 when the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 17) is executed (for example, after S53, S55 or S56). In this way, the special flag is a flag that can be established when the game state is changed from the normal game state to the time saving B, but is not established when the game state is changed from the time saving B to the normal game state. After executing the process of S3022, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3023.

At S3023, the main CPU 2201 determines a special symbol variation pattern. In this process, the main CPU 2201 refers to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the time saving table number, the reach determination The variation pattern and variation time of the special symbol are determined according to the random number for use and/or the random number for effect selection. After executing the process of S3023, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3024.

In S3024, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the special flag is 1 or not. If it is determined in S3024 that the special flag is 1 (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3025. In S3024, when it is determined that the special flag is not 1 (NO), the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

At S3025, the main CPU 2201 adds the variation time of the special symbol determined at S3023. For example, the main CPU 2201 adds the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in S3023 so that it becomes a constant time.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 may add a certain period of time to the special symbol variation time determined in S3023. After executing the process of S3025, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3026.

In S3026, the main CPU 2201 resets the special flag to 0. After executing the process of S3025, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

In this way, the main CPU 2201 sets the special flag to 1 in the game in which the game state is B time saving, and adds the special symbol variation time on the condition that the special flag is set to 1. , Ensures the execution time of the notification effect (ceiling time saving rush effect described later) that notifies that the game state has shifted to B time saving.

The first variation pattern to be transferred after the B time-saving occurrence condition is established, while the variation time of the second special symbol is added according to the establishment of the special flag, the first variation pattern to be transferred after the "jackpot" is a special flag. is not established, the variation time of the second special symbol is not added.

In other words, the first variation pattern to be transferred after establishment of the B time-saving occurrence condition is configured to facilitate execution of the second special symbol variation with a relatively longer variation time than the first variation pattern to be transferred after the "jackpot". It is

In addition, if the first variation pattern to be transferred after the "jackpot" is the "jackpot" or the "accessory release hit", the variation time is longer than the first variation pattern to be transferred after the establishment of the B time-saving occurrence condition. The second special symbol variation may be executed.

The time added based on the setting of the special flag is the execution time of the notification effect. Therefore, without changing the variation pattern table, it is possible to secure the effect time of the notification effect based on whether the special flag is established. Since there is no need for execution, the burden of control processing can be reduced.

Note that the time added based on the special flag is not limited to the time for executing only the notification effect. For example, in the time added based on the special flag, in addition to the notification effect, a different effect (for example, a game effect related to the fluctuation result of the special symbol) may be executed, or a different effect from the notification effect (for example , a game effect related to the fluctuation result of the special symbol) may be executed.

In this case, since it is possible to diversify the determination of the variable time, it is possible to determine the executable effect amount regardless of the determination of the variation pattern by the main CPU 2201. It is also possible to increase the amount of effect that can be implemented.

In addition, since the special flag is a flag that is established only when the condition for generating time reduction B is established, normal It is a flag that is not established when shifting to the time saving game state or/and the special time saving game state.

[5-3-3. Special Symbol Variation Pattern Determination Process (First Modification)]
FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing a first modification of the special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIG.

First, in S3031, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the gaming state is B time saving. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is time to rush into the B time saving.

In S3031, when it is determined that it is time to rush into B (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3032. In S3031, when it is determined that it is not the B time saving rush (NO), the main CPU 2201 executes the processing of S3035.

In S<b>3032 , the main CPU 2201 sets 1 to a special flag indicating whether or not it is time for the B time saving rush. Note that the special flag is reset to 0 when the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 17) is executed. After executing the process of S3032, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3033.

In S3033, the main CPU 2201 executes a special variation pattern determination process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols at the time of the B rush. In this modification, the main ROM 2202 stores a special variation pattern table to which at least the special symbol variation time corresponding to the time saving table number 1 is added in advance, separately from the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. ing. The special variation pattern table is a special symbol variation pattern table that is referred to only when the special flag is set to 1.

For example, the variation time corresponding to the time saving table number 1 in the special variation pattern table may be a constant time longer than the variation time corresponding to the time saving table number 1 in the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. , the time obtained by adding a certain period to the variation time corresponding to the time reduction table number 1 in the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG.

In the special variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 2201 refers to the special variation pattern table, for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the time saving table number, the reach determination The variation pattern and variation time of the special symbols are determined according to the random number and/or the random number for effect selection. After executing the process of S3033, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3034.

Depending on the hit determination result of the special symbol, a variation pattern with a different variation time may be selected, or a fixed variation time variation pattern may be selected regardless of the hit determination result. good.

In S3034, the main CPU 2201 resets the special flag to 0. After executing the process of S3034, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

In S3035, the main CPU 2201 executes a normal variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern of special symbols other than the time of B rush. In the normal variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 2201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. The variation pattern and variation time of the special symbol are determined according to the time saving table number, the random number for reach determination or/and the random number for selection of effect. After executing the process of S3035, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display time setting process.

When executing the first modification of the special symbol variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 2201 performs the special symbol variable display time setting process (S3007) of the special symbol variable display start process shown in FIG. Of the special variation pattern table and the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85), referring to the variation pattern table referred to in the first modification of the special symbol variation pattern determination processing, the first variation of the special symbol variation pattern determination processing The variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the example is determined as the variation time of the special symbol.

[5-3-4. Special Symbol Variation Pattern Determination Process (Second Modification)]
FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing a second modification of the special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIG.

First, in S3041, the main CPU 2201 determines a special symbol variation pattern. In this process, the main CPU 2201 refers to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 85), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the time saving table number, the reach determination The variation pattern and variation time of the special symbol are determined according to the random number for use and/or the random number for effect selection. After executing the process of S3041, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3042.

In S3042, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the special flag is 1 or not. If it is determined in S3042 that the special flag is 1 (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3043. In S3042, when it is determined that the special flag is not 1 (NO), the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol variation pattern determination process. The timing at which the special flag is set to 1 in the second modified example will be described later with reference to FIG.

At S3043, the main CPU 2201 adds the variation time of the special symbol determined at S3041. For example, the main CPU 2201 adds the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in S3041 so that it becomes a constant time. It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 may add a certain period of time to the special symbol variation time determined in S3041. After executing the process of S3043, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3044.

In S3044, the main CPU 2201 resets the special flag to 0. After executing the process of S3044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

[5-3-5. Special Symbol Variable Display End Processing (Modification)]
When the main CPU 2201 is caused to execute the second modification of the special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIG. 91, the special symbol variable display end process shown in FIG. 69 is changed as follows. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing a modification of the special symbol variable display ending process shown in FIG.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

First, in S3051, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1". In S3051, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO), the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol variable display end processing. In S3051, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the processing of S3052.

At S3052, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S3052, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3053.

At S3053, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3053, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3054.

At S3054, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is confirmed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of After executing the process of S3054, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3055.

In S3055, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations is a specified number. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of times of variation related to the number of times of actuation n has reached 959, and determines whether or not the game state will be B time saving in the next game.

If it is determined in S3055 that the number of fluctuations is the specified number (YES), the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S3056. In S3055, when it is determined that the number of times of variation is not the specified number of times (NO), the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol variable display end processing.

In S3056, the main CPU 2201 sets the special flag to 1. After executing the process of S3056, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process.

[5-3-6. Modification of main control process]
The special symbol variable display end process shown in FIG. 89 to FIG. 91 and the special symbol variable display end process shown in FIG. By setting the special flag to 1 in the game in which the state is B time saving (that is, the game in which the number of times of operation is n), and adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol on the condition that the special flag is set to 1 In the first game in which the game state has shifted to the B time saving, an example of securing the execution time of the notification effect for notifying that the game state has changed to the B time saving has been described.

On the other hand, the main CPU 2201 is one game before the game in which the game state is B time saving (that is, the game with the number of times of operation n), or two games before the game in which the game state is B time saving (that is, the number of times of operation n-1 game), the special flag is set to 1, and on the condition that the special flag is set to 1, by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the game state shifts to B time reduction in the next game. You may make it ensure the execution time of the information production|presentation which alert|reports that.

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets the special flag to 1 from a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games before) to 1 game before the game state becomes B time saving, and the special flag is set to 1. , By adding the variation time of the special symbols, the execution time of the notification performance for notifying that the game state will shift to the B time reduction may be secured.

In this case, the variation time can be added even in the game before the shift to the B time reduction. Therefore, since it is possible to secure the execution time for executing the ceiling time saving precursor effect described later, even if it is a fluctuation just before the B time saving rush, it will be possible to play with expectations. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In this way, when the special flag is set to 1 over a plurality of games, the main CPU 2201 adds the special symbol variation time so that the special symbol variation time sequentially changes for each game. good too.

In this case, since the variable time can be set regardless of the variable pattern, it is possible to widen the range of effects that can be executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

For example, when the special flag is set to 1 over a plurality of games, the main CPU 2201 may add the special symbol variation time so that the special symbol variation time becomes longer for each game.

Further, when the special flag is set to 1 over a plurality of games, the main CPU 2201 may add the special symbol variation time so that the special symbol variation time becomes shorter for each game.

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets the special flag to 1 from a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games before) when the gaming state becomes B time saving to the game when the gaming state becomes B time saving, and the special flag is set to 1. On the condition that it is, by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the execution time of the ceiling time saving precursor effect and the ceiling time saving rush effect which will be described later may be secured.

[5-4. Various productions]
The effect executed in the sub control process (see FIG. 40) executed by the sub CPU 2301 will be described below. It should be noted that the sub CPU 2301 (see FIG. 61) in the fourth pachinko game machine constitutes effect executing means according to the present invention. The display device 2007 (see FIG. 61) in the fourth pachinko game machine constitutes display means according to the present invention.

[5-4-1. Ceiling time saving sign production]
The sub CPU2301, the game state B time-saving, that is, the background image of the effect image displayed on the display device 2007 when the number of times the special symbols fluctuate before shifting to the special time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10) , etc., and executes a ceiling time-saving foreshadowing effect for displaying on the display device 2007 the number of fluctuations of the special symbols until the game state shifts to the special time-saving game state.

For example, the sub CPU 2301 displays "10" on the display device 2007 if the number of fluctuations in the special symbol until the game state shifts to the special time-saving game state is 10, and the game state moves to the B time-saving game state. If the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 9, display "9" on the display device 2007, and similarly thereafter, display the number of times of variation of the special symbol until the game state shifts to the special time-saving game state on the display device 2007. If the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the game state shifts to the special time-saving game state is 1, the display device 2007 is caused to display "LAST". Such a ceiling time-saving portent effect corresponds to the second suggestive effect in the present invention.

In addition, the ceiling time-saving portent effect is executed after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and ends before the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. That is, the decorative patterns are displayed after starting to fluctuate, and the display is finished when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped, so that the decorative patterns are not displayed when the decorative patterns are fixed and stopped.

[5-4-2. Ceiling time reduction rush performance]
As shown in FIG. 93, the sub CPU 2301 changes the game state from the normal game state to the special time-saving game state by the number of times of special design fluctuations reaching the number of times n of operations relating to B time-saving. , The ceiling time-saving rush performance is executed as a notification performance for notifying the transition to the special time-saving game state.

The ceiling time-saving effect is a effect that is executed in the next change after reaching the number of times n of operations. That is, it is an effect that is not executed until the variation of the second special symbol is started after reaching the operation number n.

In the ceiling time-saving rush effect, the sub CPU 2301 displays a ceiling reaching image showing that the ceiling has been reached, an effect explanation video explaining the effect in the special time-saving game state, a shield acquisition effect to acquire the shield item used in the charge mode, A title image showing a special time-saving game state, a time-saving transitioned image showing that the game state has shifted to the special time-saving game state, and a right-handed recommended image that recommends right-handed hitting are displayed sequentially or at least partially overlapped. 2007. While executing the ceiling time-saving rush effect, the sub CPU 2301 executes the effect (for example, effect related to the immediate continuous mode) related to the first special symbol fluctuation when the game state shifts to the special time-saving game state.

A sub CPU 2301 continues execution of the ceiling time-saving rush performance on the condition that the second special pattern does not start to change when the first special pattern in which the game state shifts to the special time-saving game state is stopped and displayed.

That is, the sub CPU2301, when the first second special symbol in which the game state has shifted to the special time-saving gaming state is stopped and displayed, on the condition that the variation of the second special symbol does not start, the time-saving transitioned video, and , the display of the right-handed recommended video is continued, and on the condition that the variation of the second special symbol is started, the time-saving transitioned video and the right-handed recommended video are displayed.

[5-4-3. Short rush performance at the end of the hit]
As shown in FIG. 94, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to a special time-saving gaming state (see "Special Figure 1 Big Hit (1%)", "Special Figure 2 Big Hit" and "V Winning Big Hit" in FIG. 81) at the end interval, a winning result image representing the total number of paid-out game media based on the acquired points indicating the number of paid-out game media in the current jackpot game state and the number of continuations of the jackpot game state is displayed on the display device 2007. After the display, a hit completion time-saving rush performance is executed as a notification performance for notifying transition to a special time-saving game state. In addition, it is not necessary to always display the winning result image, and instead of displaying the winning result image at the end interval, it may be displayed at the end of the special time-saving game state.

In the hit end time short rush effect, the sub CPU 2301 displays an alert video that calls attention to forgetting to take out the prepaid medium and immersion, a video related to the shield acquisition effect to acquire the shield item used in the charge mode, and the title of the special time saving game state. The display device 2007 is caused to display the title image and the time-saving transition image representing that the game state shifts to the special time-saving game state sequentially or at least partially overlapping.

It should be noted that, in the winning end time short rush effect, the sub CPU 2301 displays a warning image on the display device 2007 during the end interval of the jackpot game state that has shifted from the normal game state (including the jackpot game state that does not shift to the special time reduction game state). However, it is not necessary to display the attention calling image on the display device 2007 during the end interval of the big win game state that has shifted from the time saving game state except for the B time saving. Further, as shown in FIG. 93, in the ceiling time-saving rush effect, the sub CPU 2301 does not cause the display device 2007 to display the attention calling image.

The sub CPU 2301 ends the winning ending time reduction rush performance when the end interval of the big winning game state for shifting to the special time reduction game state ends. In addition, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the winning completion time reduction rush effect when the end interval of the big win game state that shifts to the special time reduction game state ends, regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbols has started.

The sub CPU 2301 constitutes measuring means by having a built-in timer. Thereby, the sub CPU 2301 can measure the start timing and end timing of the end interval of the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, since the built-in timer can manage the time of various images performed in the short-time rush effect at the end of winning, the winning result image, the attention calling image, the shield acquisition effect, the title image, and the game state transition image can be determined in advance. It can be executed sequentially according to the time.

In addition, the sub CPU 2301 displays the image and the title image regarding the shield acquisition effect of the ceiling time saving effect and the image and the title image regarding the shield acquisition effect of the winning end time saving effect on the display device 2007 in a common display mode. Alternatively, at least some or all of them may be displayed on the display device 2007 in a common display mode.

Furthermore, at least a part or all of the game state transition image of the ceiling time-saving rush performance and the game state transition image of the hit end time-saving rush performance may be displayed on the display device 2007 in a common display mode. The data volume of the performance to be executed can be reduced by sharing part or all of the performances executed in the ceiling time-saving rush performance and the hit end time-shortening rush performance.

[5-4-4. Art run mode effect]
As described above, when the game state shifts to the normal time-saving game state, the effect state shifts to the art run mode. The art run mode corresponds to the third rendering state in the present invention. In the art run mode, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the decorative symbol once for one variable display of the second special symbol.

When the number of variations of the second special symbol in the art run mode reaches 3 or more, the sub CPU 2301 decorates the second special symbol in the middle of each variation period on the condition that the result of the hit determination process is "losing". A pattern is stopped and displayed, and a countdown effect is executed to report the number of remaining fluctuations in the art run mode during the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern.

For example, the sub CPU 2301 stops displaying the decorative symbols in the middle of the second special symbol variation period if the result of the hit determination process is "lost" during the third variation period of the second special symbol in the art run mode. Then, the display device 2007 is caused to display "Last 4" as the remaining number of fluctuations in the art run mode during the decorative pattern fixing and stopping period.

Further, if the result of the hit determination process is "lost" in the fourth variation period of the second special symbol in the art run mode, the sub CPU 2301 stops displaying the decorative symbol in the middle of the second special symbol variation period. Then, the display device 2007 is caused to display "LAST" as the remaining number of fluctuations in the art run mode during the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern.

Further, the sub CPU 2301 determines that the result of the hit determination process is "losing" in the fifth variation period of the second special symbol in the art run mode, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol that is on hold. are all "losing", the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle of the variation period of the second special symbols, and the display device 2007 displays "end" as the remaining number of variations in the art run mode during the fixed stop period of the decorative symbols. to display.

Note that a remaining number display for informing the remaining number of times in the art run mode, which is different from the countdown effect, is displayed at the lower left of the display device 2007 . The display of the remaining number of times is displayed regardless of the hit determination result of the special symbols and the number of fluctuations.

In other words, the display of the remaining number of times shows "9" when entering the art run mode, and the number is subtracted by 1 on the condition that the pattern variation of the second special pattern is started.

The effect executed in the art run mode may be the effect executed only in the art run mode, or the effect that can be executed in all game states (for example, pending change effect). may be executed, or an executable effect (for example, the above-described countdown effect) may be executed in common with the special time-saving game state described later.

In addition, the art run mode is a game mode in which variation for nine variations is performed, but the normal time saving game state in which this art run mode is executed is a game state in which the number of times of time saving is set to 5 times.

That is, the normal time-saving gaming state ends during execution of the art run mode. Therefore, when a game-related effect (for example, the above-described countdown effect) of the remaining variation of the art run mode (for four pending) is being executed, the game state controlled by the game state control means is controlled to the normal game state. There will be

In other words, the art run mode is an effect mode that can be controlled by the game state control means in both the normal time-saving game state and the normal game state.

It should be noted that the final variation in the art run mode may be configured to vary in accordance with the pattern mode of a series of result display effects in the charge mode, which will be described later.

[5-4-5. Production of Sokuren mode]
As described above, when the game state shifts to the special time-saving game state, the effect state shifts to the immediate continuous mode. The Sokuren mode corresponds to the first effect state in the present invention.

As shown in FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b), the sub CPU 2301 basically performs fluctuation, temporary stop, re-variation, fixed stop in each fluctuation of the second special symbol in the Sokuren mode. Change the decorative pattern twice.

There are a plurality of variation patterns of decorative symbols in the Sokuren mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 95(a), the variation patterns of decorative symbols in the Sokuren mode include a pattern in which the variation time and the re-variation time are the same, and a pattern in which the variation time and the re-variation time are different. There is For example, in the variation pattern of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 95(b), the re-variation time is longer than the variation time.

By doing so, the player feels as if the fluctuation is shorter than the actual fluctuation, or the player feels as if he/she has received more lotteries than the actual number of fluctuations. Since it is possible to make it possible to play the game, it is possible to improve interest.

As mentioned above, the Sokuren mode basically changes the decoration pattern twice, such as fluctuation, temporary stop, re-variation, and fixed stop, but a special change that stops fixed without temporary stop pattern is provided. The special variation pattern is preferably a decorative symbol variation that is executed only when a big hit is achieved. In addition, not limited to this, the special variation pattern may be executed only at the time of losing, or may be configured to be executed at both the big hit and the losing.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 95(c), the number of times the decorative design is changed for each change of the second special design is not limited to two times, and may be three times or more. In this case, the sub CPU 2301 determines the number of times the symbol is temporarily stopped and changed again in one variation in the Sokuren mode based on the variation time of the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 2201 .

That is, when the main CPU 2201 determines a variation pattern with a long variation time, temporary stop and re-fluctuation are executed many times. Temporary stop and re-variation are executed for the number of times.

Even if the main CPU 2201 determines a variation pattern with a long variation time, the number of times of temporary stop and re-variation can be reduced by lengthening the time from the start of variation or the start of re-variation to the temporary stop. It also has a case to reduce it.

In addition, there are multiple patterns for the time from when the pattern changes again until the game is temporarily stopped. That is, after executing a pattern with a long time from re-fluctuation to temporary stop, a pattern with a short time from re-fluctuation to temporary stop may be executed, or a pattern with a short time from re-fluctuation to temporary stop may be executed. After that, a pattern with a long time from re-fluctuation to temporary stop may be executed, or the same pattern may be executed continuously. Also, a plurality of patterns may be similarly provided for the time from the start of pattern fluctuation to the temporary stop.

By doing so, it is possible to diversify the production pattern during the re-fluctuation, so that the interest can be improved.

The sub CPU 2301 informs the result of the hit determination process (“big win”, “accessory release win” or “losing”) by stopping the determination of decorative symbols in each variation of the second special symbol in the immediate mode.

In addition, since the fixed stop mode of the decorative pattern is substantially the same display mode for the "big win" and the "accessory open win", the player may visually wonder whether the "big win" has been won or the "accessory open win". It is difficult to recognize whether or not you have won the election.

In addition, the sub CPU 2301 does not execute the re-variation of the decorative symbols after the temporary stop in each variation of the second special symbol in the immediate continuous mode, and by making the temporary stop a fixed stop, the result of the hit determination process is determined. can also be notified.

In addition, the sub CPU 2301 can also display the final result of the hit determination process on the display device 2007 by developing the effect after the fixed stop in each variation of the second special symbol in the immediate continuous mode.

[5-4-5-1. Production state transition production]
As shown in FIG. 96, when the sub CPU 2301 determines that the result of the hit determination process does not result in a "big win" or a "accessory release win" during the immediate continuous mode, it notifies that the mode will shift to the charge mode. Execute the production state transition production.

That is, the sub CPU 2301 executes the effect state transition effect when the number of variations of the second special symbol in the instant mode is 8 and the result of the hit determination process for the eighth variation in the instant mode is "losing". do. Therefore, when the result of the hit determination process for the 8th variation in the Sokuren mode is "big hit" or "accessory hit", the effect state transition effect is not executed, so that the player feels a special decorative symbol change. can be provided.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the 8th variation in the Sokuren mode is "big hit" or "role release hit", the effect performed in the 8th variation is performed in the 1st to 7th variations. A special effect that does not occur may be executed, or the same effect as the 1st to 7th variations may be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the effect state transition effect, the sub CPU 2301 performs the pattern confirmation stop display (display example D1) of the seventh variation in the instant continuous mode, and then indicates that the instant continuous mode has ended. Sokuren mode end image (display example D2), charge mode transition image (display example D3) indicating that the effect state transitions to charge mode, effect explanation video (display example D4) for explaining effect in charge mode, and , the initial image of the charge mode (display example D5) is displayed on the display device 2007 sequentially or at least partially overlapped.

For example, as shown in a display example D1 of FIG. The second decorative pattern 2502 is stopped and displayed in the second area at the lower right of the display area of .

As shown in display example D2, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a Sokuren mode end image 2503 instead of the first decorative symbol 2501 .

As shown in a display example D3, after the display period of the Sokuren mode end image 2503 has elapsed, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a charge mode transition image 2504 instead of the Sokuren mode end image 2503 .

As shown in a display example D4 in FIG. 98, after the display period of the charge mode transition image 2504 has elapsed, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an effect explanation image 2505 instead of the charge mode transition image 2504 .

As shown in display example D5, when the display period of the effect explanation video 2505 has passed, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display the charge mode initial image 2506 instead of the effect explanation video 2505 .

It should be noted that the various images of the display examples D2 to D5 are images displayed when the eighth variation of the Sokuren mode is "losing", and the eighth variation of the Sokuren mode is "big hit" or "accessory". This is a video display that is not executed in the case of winning "open win".

As shown in display example D6, when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display the initial image 2506 of the charge mode, and stops and displays the second decorative symbol 2502. Let

The sub CPU 2301 continuously executes the effect state transition effect until the first variable display of the second special symbol in the charge mode is started. That is, the initial image 2506 in the charge mode continues to be displayed on the display device 2007 as shown in display example D6 in FIG. 98 until the first variable display of the second special symbol in the charge mode is started.

That is, when the first special symbol is variably displayed during the display of the initial image 2506 of the charge mode, the display of the initial image 2506 of the charge mode is continued, and the first variable display of the second special symbol is started. The display contents are not changed until the

By doing so, it becomes possible to clearly inform the player that the variation of the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player, has started. Since the player can easily grasp whether or not the variation of the symbols has started, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the condition for continuously executing the effect state transition effect is not limited to the start of variation of the second special symbol. For example, the condition may be that the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, or the main CPU 2201 detects the player's operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIG. 1). Winning a game ball to a different general winning opening 2122 may be a condition.

After the image of the initial image 2506 (display example D6) of this charge mode is displayed on the display device 2007, the display device 2007 performs the charge effect described later on the condition that the first variable display of the second special symbol is started. A display example D7 (see FIG. 101) is displayed.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 99, the number of variations of the second special symbol held is 4, and the result of the hit determination processing for the fourth variation in the immediate mode and the 4 variations of the second special symbol held. If all of the results of the hit determination process for the game are "losing", the sub CPU 2301 determines that the results of the hit determination process will not be "big hit" and "accessory open hit" during the immediate mode. You may start execution of transition production.

Similarly, even if the number of pending variations is 3, if the result of the hit determination process for the 5th variation in Sokuren mode and the result of the hit determination process for the 3 suspended variations are all "losing". , the sub CPU 2301 may determine that the result of the hit determination process will not be a "jackpot" or a "accessory hit" during the immediate mode, and start executing the effect state transition effect.

When configured in this manner, the sub CPU 2301 may variably display the second decorative symbol 2502 with respect to the remaining variation of the second special symbol in the immediate continuous mode during the period during which the effect state transition effect is being executed. The sub CPU 2301 does not have to variably display the second decorative symbol 2502 for the remaining variation of the second special symbol in the immediate continuous mode during the period during which the effect state transition effect is being executed.

[5-4-6. Charge mode production]
As described above, when the game state shifts to the special time-saving game state, the effect state shifts to the immediate continuous mode, and then shifts to the charge mode. The charge mode corresponds to the second effect state in the present invention.

In the charge mode, a series of result display effects are executed to display the results of hit determination processing for 5 variations, which is a combination of the 1st variation of the 2nd special symbol and the 4 variations of the reserved 2nd special symbol.

In the charge mode, the sub CPU 2301 executes a series of result display effects over a plurality of sets when the result of the hit determination process is neither a "jackpot" nor a "accessory hit".

In the fourth pachinko game machine, the sub CPU 2301 executes three sets of a series of result display effects. Therefore, the sub CPU 2301 executes the shield acquisition effect in the ceiling time reduction rush effect or winning end time reduction rush effect so that the charge mode is started from the state in which three shield items are acquired.

In addition, in the series of result display effects for these three sets, when all the results of the hit determination process are "losing", the game state shifts from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state (see FIG. 81).

In addition, the shield items acquired in the shield acquisition effect only acquire the number corresponding to the number of executions of the series of results displayed in the charge mode that will be executed after that, and three shield items will always be acquired. It's becoming Therefore, the shield item is a pseudo item acquisition effect that is acquired regardless of the number of reservations, and the shield acquisition effect is executed without being affected by the fluctuation results of the number of reservations and special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the series of result display effects, the sub CPU 2301 executes charge effect, effect zone determination effect, various zone effects and result display effect described later during the variable display period of the first variation of the second special symbol. , In the variable display period of the second to fifth variations of the second special symbol, the execution state of the result display performance is maintained.

[5-4-6-1. Charge performance]
As shown in the display examples D7 to D11 in FIGS. 101 and 102, in the charging performance, the sub CPU 2301 displays the total hit expectation 2507, which is the sum of the hit expectations of the second special symbols before the fluctuation stop, on the display device 2007. The total hit expectation 2507 is updated every time the variation of the second special symbol is suspended.

In the display examples D7 to D11, the sub CPU 2301 displays, in addition to the total hit expectation 2507, the remaining time 2508 of the charging effect, the icon display portion 2509 representing each pending variation, and the second decorative pattern 2502 on the display device 2007. display.

The icon display unit 2509 is a display unit including a variable icon display unit 2509a indicating that the icon is being changed, and a pending icon display unit 2509b showing the number of pending items stored in the pending information storage means (main RAM 2203). .

Display example D7 is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reservations corresponding to the second special symbol is zero. Here, only the variable icon display portion 2509a in the icon display portion 2509 is lit. This indicates that the second special symbol is changing. Further, the lighting number of the pending icon display portion 2509b in the icon display portion 2509 is zero.

A display example D8 shows a display example in which the number of pending items is increased by one from the state of the display example D7. Here, the lighting number of the pending icon display portion 2509b is increased by one from the display example D7, and the probability represented by the total winning expectation 2507 is increased by a predetermined number.

A display example D9 shows a display example in which the number of pending items is increased by one from the state of the display example D8. Here, the lighting number of the pending icon display portion 2509b is increased by one from the display example D8, and the probability represented by the total winning expectation 2507 is increased by a predetermined number.

A display example D10 shows a display example in which the number of pending items is increased by one from the state of the display example D9. Here, the lighting number of the pending icon display portion 2509b is increased by one from the display example D9, and the probability represented by the total winning expectation 2507 is increased by a predetermined number.

A display example D11 shows a display example in which the number of pending items is increased by one from the state of the display example D9. Here, the lighting number of the pending icon display portion 2509b is increased by one from the display example D9, and the probability represented by the total winning expectation 2507 is increased by a predetermined number. Further, the display of "first charge" is changed to the display of "standby completed", so that the player can be informed that the reserved number is full.

In the charging effect, after the variation of the second special symbol for four variations is suspended, the sub CPU 2301 displays the final total winning expectation 2507 on the display device 2007 as shown in the display example D12 of FIG. Let Thus, the effect of displaying the total winning expectation 2507 on the display device 2007 corresponds to the expectation suggesting effect in the present invention.

In addition, in the charging effect, the sub CPU 2301 displays the result of the hit determination process as "big win" or "accessory release hit" on each hold display of the icon display unit 2509 each time the variation of the second special symbol is held. You may display the information showing the degree of hit expectation which becomes ".

In addition, in the charge effect, when the four variations of the second special symbols are suspended, the sub CPU 2301 updates the total winning expectation 2507 or each time the total winning expectation 2507 is updated. A display device 2007 is made to display according to the degree of expectation that there is a variation that the result of the hit determination processing is a ``jackpot'' or a ``accessory hit'' in the variations and the variations of the second special symbols withheld. may change the background color of the image.

101 and 102 show display examples in which the total hit expectation 2507 is increased as the number of holds stored in the hold information storage means (main RAM 2203) increases, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, even if the number of holds stored in the hold information storage means increases, a pattern may be provided that does not increase the total hit expectation 2507, and when the number of holds is full (display example D21) may increase the total hit expectation 2507 only.

[5-4-6-2. Production zone decision production]
When the charging effect is completed, the sub CPU 2301 executes a effect zone determination effect for determining one effect zone from the fairy zone, Shinto zone, volcano zone and divine attack zone.

In the production zone determination production, the sub CPU 2301 determines whether the result of the hit determination processing is "big hit" or "accessory open" in the 5 variations of the second special symbol (the 1st variation and 4 variations of the reserved second special symbol). A performance zone is determined with a different probability (percentage) depending on whether or not there is a change that results in a hit.

For example, in the production zone determination production, the sub CPU 2301, if there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination processing is "big hit" or "accessory hit" among the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the second special The fairy zone is selected with a high probability as compared with the case where there is no variation in which the result of the hit determination processing is "big win" or "accessory release hit" among the 5 variations of the pattern.

In addition, in the production zone determination production, for example, the sub CPU 2301, if there is no variation in which the result of the hit determination processing is "big hit" or "accessory open hit" among the 5 variations of the second special symbol, The Shinto zone is selected with a higher probability than when there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination processing is a ``big win'' or ``a prize released'' among the 5 variations of the 2 special symbols.

In addition, in the production zone determination production, for example, the sub CPU 2301 determines whether there is a variation of "big hit" or "role release hit" in the 5 variations of the second special symbol, and "big hit" or "role release". The volcanic zone is selected with the same or approximately the same probability as when there is no change that will be "hit".

That is, in the Fairy Zone, among the five variations of the second special symbol, the degree of expectation that there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination processing is "big hit" or "accessory hit" is higher than in the Shinto Zone and the Volcano Zone. The zone has a lower degree of expectation than the fairy zone and the volcano zone, where among the 5 variations of the second special symbol, there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination process is "big win" or "character object open win".

The probability of selecting the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, and the volcanic zone is not limited to this. It may be selected at a high rate when "accessory release hit".

In addition, in the production zone determination production, for example, the sub CPU 2301 determines that the result of the hit determination processing is "big hit" or "accessory product" among the four fluctuations of the second special symbol that is being changed and the second special symbol that is reserved. If there are two or more changes that are "per hit", the divine attack zone can be selected.

That is, in the production zone determination production, the sub CPU 2301 determines that the result of the hit determination processing is "big hit" or "accessory open hit" in the four fluctuations of the second special symbol being changed and the reserved second special symbol. If there are not two or more variations that result in "", the God Attack Zone will not be selected.

In the production zone determination production, the operation of the production button 54 (see FIG. 1) is urged and the production button 54 is operated in a state in which the patterns representing the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, the volcano zone and the divine attack zone are sequentially selected. There are a plurality of types of roulette performances in which the performance zone is determined according to the event, and a normal performance in which the performance zone is determined without depending on the operation of the performance button 54.例文帳に追加

For example, there are a performance pattern for executing a roulette performance that displays a button image prompting the user to press a button, and a performance pattern for executing a roulette performance that does not display the button image, and the performance zone is determined by one of the performance patterns. A performance is performed.

In addition, the performance zone determination performance is configured so that pressing the button is more likely to develop into a zone performance with high expectation, and not prompting button pressing is more likely to develop into a zone performance with lower expectation.

In the specific example described below, the sub CPU 2301 performs a first effect zone determination effect that constitutes a effect pattern that executes a roulette effect that displays a button image, and a second effect that executes a normal effect without executing a roulette effect. Either a zone determination performance or a third performance zone determination performance capable of executing a roulette performance of displaying a button image a plurality of times is selected.

The sub CPU 2301 determines that among the 5 variations of the second special symbol (the 1st variation and the 4 variations of the reserved second special symbol), the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "accessory open hit". One performance zone determination performance is determined from the first performance zone determination performance, the second performance zone determination performance and the third performance zone determination performance with different probabilities (proportions) depending on whether there is or not.

In this example, among the first production zone decision production, the second production zone decision production and the third production zone decision production, 5 variations of the 2nd special design (4 variations of the 1st variation and the reserved 2nd special design ), the probability that the result of the hit determination process is a ``big hit'' or ``a free hit'' is the highest in the third performance zone determination performance and the lowest in the second performance zone determination performance.

In addition, among the 1st production zone decision production, the 2nd production zone decision production and the 3rd production zone decision production, 5 variations of the 2nd special design (4 variations of the 1st variation and the reserved 2nd special design) The probability that the result of the hit determination process will be a "big hit" or "a winning prize" may be the highest for the first production zone decision effect or the highest for the second production zone decision effect. good.

Also, in the first production zone decision production, the second production zone decision production and the third production zone decision production, 5 variations of the 2nd special pattern (4 variations of the 1st variation and the reserved 2nd special pattern) The probability that the result of the hit determination process will be a "big hit" or "a hit with a character open" may be the lowest in the first production zone decision effect or the lowest in the third production zone decision effect. good.

The roulette effect corresponds to the specific effect in the present invention, the effect pattern of the first effect zone determination effect and the third effect zone determination effect corresponds to the first specific effect execution pattern in the present invention, and the second effect zone determination. The effect pattern of the effect corresponds to the second specific effect execution pattern in the present invention.

[5-4-6-2-1. 1st production zone decision production]
As shown in a display example D21 in FIG. 103, in the first effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image in which the shutter display 2511 is closed while the second decorative pattern 2502 is superimposed. Note that the display example D21 is a display effect that can be transferred from the display example D12.

Next, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image in which the shutter display 2511 is opened, and various zone designs representing a fairy zone, a Shinto zone, a volcano zone, and a divine attack zone as roulette effects, as shown in a display example D22. The display device 2007 causes the display device 2007 to display a button image 2513 prompting the user to press the button together with an image in which 2512 is sequentially selected.

The sub CPU 2301 displays on the display device 2007 an image in which a predetermined number (for example, 3) of various zone patterns 2512 representing the fairy zone, Shinto zone, volcano zone, and divine attack zone are sequentially selected as a roulette effect. You can let it run.

When the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the sub CPU 2301 stops the roulette effect as shown in a display example D23, and displays the effect selected by the roulette effect as shown in a display example D31 in FIG. An image 2514 representing the zone is displayed on the display device 2007 .

As described above, in the first effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301, as shown in the display example D22 of FIG. 2513 may not be displayed, or any effect pattern may be executed in which a roulette effect is executed.

When executing the roulette effect in which the button image 2513 is not displayed, the sub CPU 2301 stops the roulette effect as shown in the display example D23 of FIG. Thus, the display device 2007 is caused to display an image 2514 representing the effect zone selected by the roulette effect (for example, the stop effect of the zone pattern indicating the transition destination zone, etc.). Display example D31 shows an example in which the fairy zone is selected.

Also, in the first effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 has a relatively higher probability of executing the roulette effect in which the button image 2513 is displayed than when executing the roulette effect in which the button image 2513 is not displayed. Select a production zone with a high hit expectation.

In addition, the displayed button image 2513 can be a default button image (for example, a white button image), a button image with a high probability of winning (for example, a red button image), or a special symbol for a "big hit" or " A button image (for example, a rainbow-colored button image) or the like may be displayed to definitely inform the player that the prize will be "hit".

[5-4-6-2-2. 2nd production zone decision production]
As shown in a display example D41 of FIG. 105, in the second effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 suggests that the final total hit expectation 2507 displayed on the display device 2007 in the charge effect will further increase. An image 2521 is displayed on the display device 2007 . Note that the display example D41 is a display effect that can be transferred from the display example D12.

Next, as shown in a display example D42, the sub CPU 2301 sets a winning expectation 2522 that is higher than the final total winning expectation 2507 (see display example D12 in FIG. 102) displayed on the display device 2007 in the charging effect. Displayed on the display device 2007 .

Thus, when the second effect zone determination effect is not executed, the final total hit expectation 2507 (see display example D12 in FIG. 102) displayed on the display device 2007 in the charge effect is maintained. When the second effect zone determination effect is executed, the final total hit expectation 2507 (see display example D12 in FIG. 102) displayed on the display device 2007 in the charge effect further increases.

The effect pattern when the second effect zone determination effect is not executed corresponds to the first expectation level suggesting effect execution pattern in the present invention, and the effect pattern when the second effect zone determination effect is executed corresponds to the present invention. This corresponds to the second expectation degree suggesting effect execution pattern in the invention.

Next, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image in which the second decorative pattern 2502 is superimposed and the shutter display 2511 is closed, as shown in a display example D43. Next, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image in which the shutter display 2511 is opened, and causes the display device 2007 to display a pattern 2514 representing the determined effect zone, as shown in the display example D31 of FIG.

[5-4-6-2-3. 3rd production zone decision production]
As shown in a display example D51 in FIG. 106, the sub CPU 2301 successively displays continuation patterns 2531 representing "continuation" in addition to various zone patterns 2512 representing a fairy zone, a Shinto zone, a volcano zone, and a divine attack zone as roulette effects. The video to be selected is displayed, and the display device 2007 is caused to display a button image 2513 prompting the user to press the button.

When the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the sub CPU 2301 stops the roulette effect as shown in a display example D52. Here, when "Continue" is selected by the roulette effect, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image 2532 indicating that "Continue" is selected by the roulette effect, as shown in a display example D53. After that, as shown in display example D54 in FIG. 107, the roulette effect is executed again.

The roulette effect executed after continuation (display example D54) is not limited to the effect pattern of displaying the same symbols as the roulette effect executed before continuation (display example D51). For example, after the continuation, the roulette effect may be executed with a pattern of hiding the continuation pattern 2531, or the roulette effect may be executed with a pattern of not displaying the low-expected zone pattern (the Shinto zone pattern in this embodiment). Alternatively, the roulette performance may be executed with a pattern in which neither the continuous symbol 2531 nor the zone symbol with a low degree of expectation are displayed.

The sub CPU 2301 displays an image in which a predetermined number (for example, 3) of various zone patterns 2512 representing a fairy zone, a Shinto zone, a volcano zone, a divine attack zone, and continuation are sequentially selected as a roulette effect on the display device 2007. may be displayed.

When an effect zone other than "Continue" is selected as shown in display example D55 by the roulette effect shown in display example D54 of FIG. The display device 2007 is caused to display an image 2514 representing the rendered effect zone. Display example D56 shows an example in which the divine attack zone is selected.

It should be noted that even if an effect zone other than "Continue" is selected by the roulette effect shown in the display example D51 of FIG. The display device 2007 is caused to display an image 2514 representing the effect zone.

As described above, in the third effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 executes the roulette effect of displaying the button image 2513 as the roulette effect, as shown in the display example D51 of FIG. 106 and the display example D54 of FIG. and an effect pattern in which a roulette effect in which the button image 2513 is not displayed may be executed.

When executing a roulette effect in which the button image 2513 is not displayed, the sub CPU 2301 stops the roulette effect after a predetermined time elapses, as shown in the display example D52 of FIG. 106 and the display example D55 of FIG. As shown in a display example D56, the display device 2007 displays an image 2514 representing the effect zone selected by the roulette effect.

Also, in the third effect zone determination effect, the sub CPU 2301 has a relatively higher probability of executing a roulette effect in which the button image 2513 is displayed than in executing a roulette effect in which the button image 2513 is not displayed. to select a production zone with a high hit expectation or "continue".

In addition, the displayed button image 2513 can be a default button image (for example, a white button image), a button image with a high probability of winning (for example, a red button image), or a special symbol for a "big hit" or " A button image (for example, a rainbow-colored button image) or the like may be displayed to definitely inform the player that the prize will be "hit".

[5-4-6-3. Various zone effects]
When the effect zone determination effect is completed, the sub CPU 2301 executes the effect of the effect zone determined by the effect zone determination effect. It should be noted that the sub CPU 2301 may determine the effect zone without executing the effect zone determination effect, and may execute the effect of the determined effect zone. The performances of the performance zones determined by the performance zone determination performance, that is, the performances of the fairy zone, the Shinto zone, the volcano zone and the divine attack zone correspond to the predetermined performances in the present invention.

[5-4-6-3-1. Production of Fairy Zone]
In effecting the fairy zone, the sub CPU 2301 causes the first decorative pattern 2501 to be displayed in the first area near the center of the display area of the display device 2007, as shown in FIG. A second decorative pattern 2502 is displayed in the second area of the display device 2007, and a zone display portion 2541 showing the zone in which the player is staying is displayed in the third area on the upper left of the display area of the display device 2007.

In the effect of the fairy zone, the first decorative pattern 2501 indicates whether or not there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination process is a "big hit" or a "accessory hit" among the five variations of the second special symbol. The second decorative design 2502 is interlocked with the second special design. The first decorative design 2501 corresponds to the specific design in the present invention, and the second decorative design 2502 corresponds to the predetermined design in the present invention.

FIG. 108 and FIG. 109 show a display example when all the results of the special symbol hit determination process for 5 variations of the second special symbol are "losing". At the time of the first variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the first decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 as shown in the display example D61 of FIG.

As shown in display example D61, the fairy zone is configured to include at least a zone display portion 2541, an area for displaying the first decorative pattern 2501, and an area for displaying the second decorative pattern 2502. Similarly, the volcano zone, Shinto zone, and divine attack zone, which will be described later, are configured to include at least a zone display portion 2541, an area for displaying the first decorative pattern 2501, and an area for displaying the second decorative pattern 2502. there is

At the time of stop display of the first variation of the five variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 puts the first decorative symbol 2501 into the temporary stop display state, and the second decorative symbol 2502 to the fixed stop display ( hereinafter also simply referred to as stop display).

In the temporary stop display, the symbol swings up and down or is slightly moved (see the first decorative symbol 2501 in the display example D62) to inform the player of the temporary stop state, and the fixed stop display is performed. is not displayed to sway up and down (see the second decorative pattern 2502 of the display example D62 and the first decorative pattern 2501 of the display example D65) to inform the player that it is a fixed stop display. .

At the time of the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol (the first variation of the suspension stored in the suspension storage means), the sub CPU 2301 changes the first decorative symbol 2501 to the temporary stop display, as shown in the display example D63. In the maintained state, the second decorative pattern 2502 is variably displayed.

At the time of stop display of the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol (the first variation of the suspension stored in the suspension storage means), the sub CPU 2301 displays the first decorative symbol as shown in the display example D64 of FIG. The second decorative pattern 2502 is stopped and displayed while the 2501 is maintained in the temporary stop display state.

Display example 64 shows an example in which the pattern modes of the first decorative pattern 2501 and the second decorative pattern 2502 are different (asynchronous). It may be controlled so that the design modes of the first decorative design 2501 and the second decorative design 2502 are the same (synchronized) even in the stop display of the held pending first variation).

At the time of each variation from the 3rd time to the 5th time of the 5th variation of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 puts the first decorative symbol 2501 into the temporary stop display in the same manner as at the time of the second variation of the 5th variation of the second special symbol. In the maintained state, the second decorative pattern 2502 is variably displayed.

During the stop display of the fifth variation of the five variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 causes the first decorative symbol 2501, which has been maintained in the temporary stop display state, to be stopped and displayed, as shown in a display example D65. The decorative pattern 2502 is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the second decorative pattern 2502 is stopped and displayed at the time of the fifth stop display of the five fluctuations of the second special pattern, the first decorative pattern 2501 may be temporarily stopped and displayed for a while. It may be configured such that the 1 decorative pattern 2501 is not displayed temporarily.

In FIGS. 108 and 109, as shown in the display example D62, the example in which the sub CPU 2301 puts the first decorative pattern 2501 into the temporary stop display state to execute the result display effect has been described, but FIGS. As shown in , the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display an image (hereinafter also referred to as a "losing image") explicitly indicating "losing" after the first decorative pattern 2501 is temporarily stopped. A result display effect may be executed.

Display examples D71 to D75 shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 correspond to display examples D61 to D65 shown in FIGS. That is, when the first variation of the five variations of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 2301 puts the first decorative symbol 2501 into the temporary stop display state, and the second decorative symbol 2502, as shown in the display example D72 of FIG. is stopped and displayed, in display examples D73 to D75, instead of the first decorative pattern 2501, a lost image 2542 is displayed in the first area.

This lost image 2542 is an image including a zone end image display portion 2542a indicating that the zone effect being executed is finished, and an acquired game medium number notification portion 2542b for informing the player of the number of acquired game media. .

Note that the lost image 2542 is not limited to the zone end image display portion 2542a and the acquired game media number notification portion 2542b, and various information (for example, display of a title related to the number of acquired game media, A setting suggestion display for suggesting the setting values of the gaming machine to the player may be displayed.

In display examples D73 to D75, the sub CPU 2301 displays the lost image 2542 in the first area so as to be superimposed on the first decorative pattern 2501 shown in display examples D63 to D65 in FIGS. 108 and 109. may

Further, when the fairy zone is selected for the first set or the second set of the series result display production, the sub CPU 2301 executes the fairy zone production as shown in FIGS. When the fairy zone is selected for the third set of effects, the fairy zone effects may be executed as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG.

FIGS. 112 to 114 show display examples when the result of the special symbol hit determination process for the third variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol is "big hit" or "accessory open hit". . At the first variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the first decorative symbol 2501 and the second decorative symbol 2502 as shown in the display example D81 of FIG.

When the first variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 2301 temporarily stops the first decorative symbol 2501 in a manner representing "jackpot" or "accessory release", as shown in display example D82. The display state is set, and the second decorative pattern 2502 is stopped and displayed in a manner representing "losing".

At the time of the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the second decorative symbol 2502 while maintaining the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol 2501, as shown in a display example D83. .

During the stop display of the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301, as shown in the display example D84 of FIG. The decorative pattern 2502 is stopped and displayed in a mode representing "losing".

At the time of the third variation of the five variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the second decorative symbol 2502 while maintaining the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol 2501, as shown in a display example D85. .

At the time of stop display of the third variation of the five variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 causes the first decorative symbol 2501, which has been maintained in the temporary stop display state, to be stopped and displayed, as shown in a display example D86. ” or “hit the role item released”.

In the display example D86, it is preferable that the symbol stopped in the second decorative symbol 2502 is the same symbol as the symbol temporarily stopped or stopped in the first decorative symbol 2501 . If they are the same, the player can grasp in advance the type of "big win" or "accessory release win" that shifts according to the pattern before the change, so that the sense of slowness of the game can be reduced. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

After that, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a win image 2543 representing a "big win" or "accessory win" as a result display effect, as shown in a display example D87 of FIG. Note that the display example D87 shows a winning image 2543 representing "a prize to be released", and the winning image 2543 representing a "big win" is different from the display example D87 (for example, "Big win! Aim for the right attacker!"). ”) is displayed on the display device 2007 .

It should be noted that even if the game is a "big win", a win image 2543 may be displayed that indicates "a prize released" as shown in D87. In this case, since it is possible to eliminate the distinction between the "jackpot" and the "accessory winning", it is interesting to win a winning with a low profit rate (for example, "accessory opening"). You will be able to prevent it from declining.

In this example, the result of the special symbol hit determination process for the third variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol was "big hit" or "accessory hit", so the two variations of the second special symbol are remains on hold.

In other words, the second special symbol is changed twice and is held to be changed and stop-displayed in the immediate consecutive mode after the end of the big hit. In addition, when V prize is not won during the "accessory winning", it is suspended in which zone presentation of various zone presentations is varied or stopped according to the expectation of winning for the remaining two times of suspension.

Although the second decorative design 2502 is not displayed in the display example D87, the display of the second decorative design 2502 may be maintained.

FIGS. 115 and 116 show display examples when the result of the special symbol hit determination process for the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol is "big hit" or "accessory open hit". . The example shown in FIGS. 115 and 116 is an example of the resurrection effect in which the winning image 2543 is displayed in the first area after the losing image 2542 is displayed in the first area, as shown in the display example D73 in FIG. showing.

As shown in the display example D91 of FIG. 115, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the first decorative design 2501 and the second decorative design 2502 at the time of the first variation of the 5 variations of the second special design, and as shown in the display example D92. , When the first variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 2501 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the second decorative symbol 2502 is stopped and displayed.

After stop-displaying the second decorative design 2502, the sub CPU 2301 displays a lost image 2542 in the first area and variably displays the second decorative design 2502, as shown in a display example D93. When the second decorative pattern 2502 is variably displayed, the sub CPU 2301 displays a resurrection suggesting image 2544 suggesting that a resurrection effect will be executed in the first area, as shown in a display example D94 of FIG.

In the resurrection effect, at the time of stop display of the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 displays the first decoration in a manner representing "big win" or "accessory open win" as shown in display example D95. The design 2501 and the second decorative design 2502 are stopped and displayed.

After that, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a win image 2543 representing a "jackpot win" or a "accessory win" as a result display effect, as shown in a display example D96. Note that the display example D96 shows a winning image 2543 representing "a prize to be released", and the winning image 2543 representing a "big win" is different from the display example D96 (for example, "Big win! Aim for the right attacker! ”) is displayed on the display device 2007 .

It should be noted that even if the game is a "big win", a win image 2543 may be displayed that indicates "a prize released" as shown in D87. In this case, since it is possible to eliminate the distinction between the "jackpot" and the "accessory winning", it is interesting to win a winning with a low profit rate (for example, "accessory opening"). You will be able to prevent it from declining.

In this example, the result of the special symbol hit determination process for the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol was "big hit" or "accessory hit", so the three variations of the second special symbol are remains on hold.

In other words, the second special symbol is changed twice and is held to be changed and stop-displayed in the immediate consecutive mode after the end of the big hit. In addition, when V prize is not won during the "accessory winning", it is suspended in which zone presentation of various zone presentations is varied or stopped according to the expectation of winning for the remaining two times of suspension.

Although the second decorative design 2502 is not displayed in the display example D96, the display of the second decorative design 2502 may be maintained.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process for the third variation of the five variations of the second special symbol is "big win" or "accessory hit", the losing image 2542 is replaced by three of the five variations of the second special symbol. The display may be continued until the variation for the variation is started, or the loss image 2542 is hidden at the time when the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol is started, and the resurrection effect is performed. You can make it run.

Alternatively, the resurrection effect may be executed while the lost image 2542 is being displayed. In this case, the display area for displaying the lost image 2542 and the display area for displaying the revival suggesting image 2544 may be displayed in different display areas, or the failing image 2542 and the revival suggesting image 2544 may be superimposed. You can also run it like this:

In FIGS. 117 to 119, when the effect of the fairy zone is started, the number of variations of the suspended second special symbol is less than 4, and the second special symbol during variation and the second special symbol whose variation is suspended are shown. All the results of the hit determination processing for the special symbols are "losing", and the results of the hit determination processing for the variation of the second special symbol held after the fairy zone production is started are "big hit" or "accessory hit". ” is shown.

In the Fairy Zone production started when the number of pending variations of the second special symbol is 1, at the first variation of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 displays the first The decorative pattern 2501 and the second decorative pattern 2502 are variably displayed.

At the start of the effect in the fairy zone, the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol that is changing and the second special symbol that has been suspended is "losing", so when the first variation is stopped and displayed in the fairy zone, As shown in a display example D102, the first decorative pattern 2501 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a failed manner, and the second decorative pattern 2502 is stopped and displayed.

At the time of the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the second decorative symbol 2502 while maintaining the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol 2501, as shown in the display example D103. .

During stop display of the second variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301, as shown in the display example D104 of FIG. The decorative pattern 2502 is stopped and displayed.

At the time of the third variation of the five variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the second decorative symbol 2502 while maintaining the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol 2501, as shown in the display example D105. .

In this example, the variation of the second special symbol (the third variation of the second special symbol) is newly suspended and newly suspended before the display example D105 is displayed after the effect of the fairy zone is started. Assume that the result of the hit determination process for the variation is "big win" or "accessory release win".

In this case, at the time of the third stop display of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301, as shown in the display example D106, displays the first decorative symbol 2501 and The second decorative pattern 2502 is stopped and displayed.

In the display example D106, both the first decorative pattern 2501 and the second decorative pattern 2502 are changed to represent "big win" or "opening of the role", but the display example is not limited to this. . For example, only the second decorative pattern 2502 is set to represent a "jackpot" or "accessory opening hit", while the first decorative pattern 2501 is not configured to represent a "jackpot" or "accessory opening hit". It may be constituted so as to be stopped and displayed as it is in the previous mode (a mode representing "lost"), or the first decorative pattern 2501 may be hidden and only the second decorative pattern 2502 may be displayed.

After that, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a win image 2543 representing a "big win" or "accessory win" as a result display effect, as shown in a display example D107 of FIG.

Note that the display example D107 shows a winning image 2543 representing "a prize to be released", and the winning image 2543 representing a "big win" is different from the display example D107 (for example, "Big win! Aim for the right attacker!"). ”) is displayed on the display device 2007 .

It should be noted that even if the game is a "big win", a win image 2543 may be displayed that indicates "a prize released" as shown in D87. In this case, since it is possible to eliminate the distinction between the "jackpot" and the "accessory winning", it is interesting to win a winning with a low profit rate (for example, "accessory opening"). You will be able to prevent it from declining.

Although the second decorative design 2502 is not displayed in the display example D107, the display of the second decorative design 2502 may be maintained.

In the above example, the result of the hit determination process for the variation (the third variation of the second special symbol) newly suspended before the display example D105 is displayed after the effect of the fairy zone is started is " In the case of "losing", at the time of the third stop display of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 keeps the first decorative symbol 2501 in the temporary stop display state in the mode of losing, and the second decorative symbol 2502. is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 109).

[5-4-6-3-2. Shinto zone production]
In the performance of the Shinto zone, the sub CPU 2301 determines that the result of the hit determination processing is " Expectation degree symbol representing the degree of expectation that there is a variation of "big hit" or "accessory release", and the result of the hit determination process among the 5 variations of the second special symbol is "big hit" or "accessory release" Each pattern of the first decorative pattern 2501 is changed to a winning pattern or the like indicating that there is a variation of "win", the decorative patterns are variably displayed, and performance is executed according to the result of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

For example, when three identical winning symbols are displayed side by side as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the sub CPU 2301 determines that the result of the winning determination processing is "big hit" among the five variations of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the display device 2007 is caused to display an image indicating whether or not there is a change that will result in a "winning prize".

Also, when three identical performance zone transition symbols are displayed side by side as a result of variable display of decorative symbols, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to a performance zone corresponding to the performance zone transition symbols. For example, the sub CPU 2301 executes the effect of the fairy zone when the transitional symbols representing the fairy zone are displayed side by side as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

The relationship between the temporary stop display and the stop display of the first decorative pattern 2501 and the second decorative pattern 2502 in the Shinto zone, the relationship between the display of the lost image 2542 and the resurrection effect, etc. are shown in FIGS. 108 to 119. It is executed in the same or substantially the same manner as the display example shown. However, in the Shinto zone, the zone display section 2541 displays "Shinto zone".

[5-4-6-3-3. Production of volcano zone]
In the production of the volcano zone, the sub CPU 2301 executes the variable display of the first decorative pattern 2501 a plurality of times (for example, 5 times to 10 times), and the results of the hit determination processing are among the 5 variations of the second special pattern. The display device 2007 is caused to display an icon image corresponding to the number of "big win" or "accessory free win".

In the production of the volcano zone, when the variable display of the first decorative pattern 2501 is completed, the sub CPU 2301 determines that the result of the hit determination processing is "big win" or "accessory open hit" among the five variations of the second special symbol. The display device 2007 is caused to display an image indicating whether or not there is a change.

The relationship between the temporary stop display and the stop display of the first decorative pattern 2501 and the second decorative pattern 2502 in the volcano zone, the relationship between the display of the lost image 2542 and the resurrection effect, etc. are shown in FIGS. 108 to 119. It is executed in the same or substantially the same manner as the display example shown. However, in the volcano zone, the zone display section 2541 displays "volcano zone".

[5-4-6-3-4. God attack zone production]
FIGS. 120 and 121 show display examples of the performance of the divine attack zone. At the time of the first change of the second special symbol 5 changes in the effect of the God attack zone, the sub CPU 2301 prompts the continuous operation of the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) as shown in the display example D111 of FIG. 120. 2551 and the second decorative pattern 2502 are displayed on the display device 2007 .

Next, as shown in a display example D112, the sub CPU 2301 changes the image of the first mode prompting the continuous operation of the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) to the image 2552 of the second mode, and the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) ), and the number of variations (number of variations) where the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "accessory open hit" among the 5 variations of the second special symbol. The display device 2007 further displays a winning number image 2553 representing the number of wins.

The winning number image 2553 represents 0 at the beginning of display. As shown in a display example D113 and a display example D114 in FIG. 121, the sub CPU 2301 increases the number represented by the winning number image 2553 by one in response to successive operations of the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1).

As described above, the effect of the divine attack zone is that the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "accessory hit" in the four variations of the second special symbol that is changing and the second special symbol that is withheld. , the number represented by the winning number image 2553 is 2 or more and 5 or less.

At the time of stop display of the first variation of the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 2301 determines that, among the 5 variations of the second special symbol, the result of the hit determination process is "big hit" or "role", as shown in the display example D115. The display device 2007 is caused to display a win number image 2554 representing the number of fluctuations that result in an object release hit.

Here, the sub CPU 2301 may cause the display device 2007 to display the first decorative pattern 2501 in addition to the winning number image 2554 . In this case, the sub CPU 2301 may cause the display device 2007 to display the winning number image 2554 so as to be superimposed on the first decorative pattern 2501 . Also, the winning number image 2553 may be displayed in the display example D115 continuously from the display example D114.

After displaying the winning number image 2554, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a winning image 2543 representing a "big win" or "a winning prize" as a result display effect, as shown in a display example D116.

Note that the display example D116 shows a winning image 2543 representing "a prize to be released", and the winning image 2543 representing a "big win" is different from the display example D116 (for example, "Big win! Aim for the right attacker! ”) is displayed on the display device 2007 .

It should be noted that even if the game is a "big win", a win image 2543 may be displayed that indicates "a prize released" as shown in D87. In this case, since it is possible to eliminate the distinction between the "jackpot" and the "accessory winning", it is interesting to win a winning with a low profit rate (for example, "accessory opening"). You will be able to prevent it from declining.

Although the second decorative design 2502 is not displayed in the display example D107, the display of the second decorative design 2502 may be maintained.

[5-4-7. Special production of time-saving game state]
In the time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 2301 confirms that "jackpot" or "accessory winning" is selected for the second special symbol that is being changed, and that the reserved second special symbol is changed. If "jackpot" or "role release hit" is selected for the game, SP reach (hereinafter also referred to as "special effect") is provided in any of the effect modes of art run mode, immediate mode and charge mode. can be executed.

The special effects include a special effect that can be executed in all of the art run mode, the immediate mode, and the charge mode, a special effect that can be executed in one effect mode and not executed in the other two effect modes, and , there is a special effect that can be executed in two effect modes and is not executed in the other one effect mode.

[5-4-7-1. Suspended production]
In the following, a description will be given of the holding continuous effect, which is a special effect that can be executed in the charge mode and is not executed in the art run mode and the immediate continuous mode.

The holding consecutive effect is that 10 rounds of "jackpot" or "role opening hit" is selected for the second special symbol that is being changed, and that it is predetermined in the change of the second special symbol that is being held. This is an effect whose execution condition is that 10 rounds of "jackpot" or "role release win" is selected for a number (in this example, 2) or more variations.

In the charge mode, the sub CPU 2301 can execute the holding continuous effect if the execution condition is satisfied while executing any one of the fairy zone, Shinto zone and volcano zone effects.

For example, as shown in FIG. 122, the sub CPU 2301 turns off the display screen of the display device 2007 and displays the message "Please stop left" while executing the Shinto zone effect in the charge mode. Displayed on the display device 2007 . When the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) is operated within the effective period, the sub CPU 2301 stops displaying the left decorative pattern among the three decorative patterns that are being variably displayed.

When the left decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a message such as "Please stop playing". When the effect button 54 is operated within the effective period, the sub CPU 2301 stops displaying the decorative symbols inside.

When the decorative pattern inside is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a message such as "Please stop right." When the effect button 54 is operated within the valid period, the sub CPU 2301 stops displaying the right decorative symbol.

As a result, the decorative pattern is displayed on the display device 2007 with three special patterns (for example, "G") lined up. The sub CPU 2301 causes the display device 2007 to display a special symbol establishment image regarding an effect to be executed when three special symbols are arranged.

Incidentally, if the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) is not operated within each valid period, the sub CPU 2301 may display each decorative pattern on the display device 2007 after the valid period ends. You may make it complete|finish (cancel) continuous production.

It should be noted that the holding consecutive effect is not limited to being executed when the variation being executed is "big win" or "accessory release win". For example, although the variation being executed is "losing", it is executed on the condition that a predetermined number (for example, three) or more of the suspension exists in the variation of the second special symbol that has been suspended. can be

In this case, regardless of whether or not the second special symbol that is fluctuating wins the ``jackpot'' or the ``accessory hit'', it is possible to execute the holding consecutive production, so the range of timings in which the holding consecutive production can be executed. can be expanded, it is possible to provide an effect with a more special feeling to the player.

Although the holding continuous effect is not performed in the art run mode and the immediate continuous mode, it may be configured to be performed in either or both modes.

Also, the holding continuous effect may be executed in the divine attack zone. In this case, the player can recognize that he or she will win the ``big win'' or the ``accessory prize'' twice or more by entering the divine strike zone, and after that, the player can realize the ``big win'' by executing the holding series effect. ” or “per item release” three or more times. Interest can be improved.

[5-4-7-2. Full rotation performance]
The full rotation effect, which is a special effect that can be executed in the charge mode and is not executed in the art run mode and the immediate continuous mode, will be described below. The full rotation effect can be executed even in the normal game state, and constitutes the first suggestive effect in the present invention.

In the all-rotation performance, ``jackpot'' or ``opening of the role'' is selected for the second special symbol during variation, and at least one or more is selected in the variation of the second special symbol held. This is a so-called definite effect that the execution condition is that "big win" or "accessory release win" is selected with respect to the variation of .

The sub CPU 2301 can execute the full rotation effect at any timing in the art run mode and the immediate continuous mode if the execution conditions are satisfied. In the charge mode, the sub CPU 2301 executes a full rotation effect if the execution conditions are satisfied when executing any one of the fairy zone, Shinto zone, volcano zone, or divine attack zone effect. can be done.

In the full-rotation effect, the sub CPU 2301 executes a freeze effect that delays the timing of starting the variation of the three decorative symbols for a certain period of time, and then executes the three decorative symbols while the same symbols are aligned for at least a part of the period. Three decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a state that the same patterns are aligned by variably displaying them.

Since the full-rotation performance is executed after the special feeling by the freeze performance is produced, the performance is executed which can emphasize to the player that the ``big hit'' or ``hit the character is released'' is selected. be able to.

Even in the normal game state, the sub CPU 2301 may execute a full rotation effect under the execution condition that a "jackpot" capable of transitioning to a special time-saving game state is selected for the first special symbol that is fluctuating. . In this case, the sub CPU 2301, at the start of the re-variation of the decorative symbols for the fourth time in the pseudo continuous effect, makes it appear as if the re-variation display of the decorative symbols is repeated a plurality of times during one variable display period of the special symbols. A full rotation effect can be executed.

When executing the full-rotation performance in the normal game state, it can be executed on the condition that the changing first special symbol or second special symbol is selected as "big win" or "accessory release win". , whether or not there is a "jackpot" or "accessory release hit" in the variation of the reserved first special symbol or second special symbol is not a condition. That is, when executing the full-rotation effect in the normal game state, the execution conditions are different from those in the case of executing the full-rotation effect in the charge mode.

In addition, the full rotation effect is configured to be executable during the variation of the special symbol that executes the above-described ceiling time saving precursor effect. In other words, it is configured such that both the full rotation production and the ceiling time saving precursor production can be executed during the fluctuation of one special symbol.

In this case, it may be configured such that the full rotation performance is executed after execution of the ceiling time saving portent performance, or the ceiling time saving portent performance may be executed after the execution of the full rotation performance. Moreover, it may be configured such that all or at least part of the ceiling time-saving portent effect and the full-rotation effect are overlapped.

Incidentally, the full rotation effect executed in the normal game state is not limited to the start of the fourth re-fluctuation in the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, it may be executed via a freeze effect when a normal reach occurs, or may be executed via a freeze effect after an SP reach loss.

In this case, since it is possible to execute the full-rotation effect at a plurality of timings, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation for all fluctuating timings.

It should be noted that the all-spin effect may be configured to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for winning is high. In other words, it is possible to execute an effect pattern in which "lost" is displayed after the full-rotation effect is executed without necessarily shifting to "big win" or "role object release win" after the effect of the full-rotation effect.

[5-5. Various actions and effects]
As described above, the fourth pachinko game machine changes the production state of the special time-saving gaming state by shifting the production state to the charge mode when 8 fluctuations occur in the immediate continuous mode in the special time-saving gaming state. Because of the diversification, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine immediately changes the effect state when either the first condition that is established when the big hit is completed or the second condition that is established when the time B is reached is satisfied. Since the conditions for transitioning to the special time-saving gaming state are diversified by shifting to the continuous mode, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine diversifies the performance state of the time-saving game state after the end of the big win by shifting the performance state to either the immediate continuous mode or the art run mode after the end of the big win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, when the fourth pachinko game machine shifts the effect state from the immediate continuous mode to the charge mode, the effect state transition effect is continued until the first variable display of the second special symbol in the charge mode is started. Since it is executed, it is possible to reliably inform the player that the performance mode has shifted from the immediate continuous mode to the charge mode.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine, in the charge mode, executes a series of result display effects for displaying the results of the hit determination process in which the five variations of the second special symbols are summarized, so that one time by the series of result display effects Since the degree of expectation that the result of the hit determination process will be a "big win" or "accessory release win" is increased, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine can execute a special effect according to the effect mode, such as not executing the holding continuous effect as a special effect that can be executed in the charge mode in the immediate continuous mode.

In addition, in the charge mode, the fourth pachinko game machine determines whether or not there is a variation in which the result of the hit determination process is a "big hit" or a "accessory hit" among the five variations of the second special symbol. By determining one performance zone from among a fairy zone, a Shinto zone, a volcano zone and a divine attack zone with a certain probability, the performance state of the charge mode is diversified, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Further, the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in the series result display effect, stops displaying the first decorative pattern 2501 for the 5 variations of the second special pattern, and the second decorative pattern for the 5 variations of the second special symbol. Since 2502 is variably displayed, it is possible to show the player the result of each of the 5 variations of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when the fairy zone effect is started, the number of variations of the second special symbols held is less than 4, and the second special symbols and variations that are in process of being held are held. All the results of the hit determination processing for the second special pattern are "losing", and the result of the hit determination processing for the variation of the second special pattern held after the performance of the fairy zone is started is "big hit" or "accessory". In the case of "open win", the first decorative pattern 2501 is put in a temporary stop display state in a losing mode until the fluctuation of the second special pattern suspended after the production of the fairy zone is started, and the production of the fairy zone is performed. When the variation of the second special symbol held after the start is stopped, the first decorative symbol 2501 is stopped and displayed in a mode representing "big win" or "accessory release win".

For this reason, the fourth pachinko game machine does not cause inconsistency in the performance mode even if the number of variations of the reserved second special symbols is less than 4 when the performance of the fairy zone is started. A fairy zone production can be executed.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine has a first effect zone determination effect and a third effect zone determination effect that constitute a effect pattern for executing a roulette effect that displays a button image 2513 that prompts button depression in the effect zone determination effect. , a second effect zone determination effect in which a button image 2513 prompting button depression is displayed, and a roulette effect is not executed.

Further, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when the second performance zone determination performance is not executed in the charge performance, the final total winning expectation 2507 displayed on the display device 2007 in the charge performance is maintained. When the first expectation degree suggesting performance execution pattern is executed and the second performance zone determination performance is executed, the final total winning expectation degree 2507 displayed on the display device 2007 in the charge performance is further increased. By executing the expectation degree suggesting performance execution pattern of (1), the performance representing the winning expectation degree in the charge performance is diversified, so that the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine executes multiple sets of a series of result display effects in the charge mode, thereby executing the result display effects a plurality of times, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine, when either the first condition that is established triggered by the end of the hit and the second condition that is established by reaching the B time saving is established, the game state By shifting to the special time-saving game state, the conditions for transition to the special time-saving game state are diversified, so that the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from decreasing.

Also, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the variation pattern table selected during the special time-saving game state is a variation pattern corresponding to the time-saving table numbers 1 to 2 selected when the game state shifts to the special time-saving game state. and a table of variation patterns corresponding to time saving table numbers 3 to 5, which is selected after a predetermined number of special symbols are selected based on the table of variation patterns corresponding to time saving table numbers 1 to 2. including.

Therefore, the fourth pachinko game machine can execute an effect according to the number of games in the special time-saving game state by changing the time-saving table number selected during the special time-saving game state.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine suggests to the player that the normal game state will shift to the special time-saving game state by the full-rotation performance and the ceiling time-saving foreshadowing performance, which reduces the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine displays the image and the title image regarding the shield acquisition effect of the ceiling time-saving rush effect and the image and the title image regarding the shield acquisition effect of the win-end short-time rush effect in a common display mode. , it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required for storing data relating to the effect.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine executes a ceiling time-saving rush effect until the first variable display of special symbols in B time-saving is performed when the number of times of special pattern fluctuation reaches the number of times of operation n related to B time-saving. Therefore, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the variation of the first special symbol in the B time saving.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game state that shifts to the special time-saving game state ends, starts the end interval of the jackpot game state that shifts to the special time-saving game state regardless of the fluctuation state of the special symbols. Sometimes, in order to execute a winning end time reduction rush performance, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the game state will shift to the special time reduction game state before the game state shifts from the big win game state to the special time reduction game state. can.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game state that shifts to the special time-saving game state ends, before the game state shifts from the jackpot game state to the special time-saving game state, performs a hit-finishing time-shortening rush performance. Executed, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern reaches the number of times n of operation relating to B time saving, the ceiling time saving rush effect is executed during the first fluctuation display of the special pattern in B time saving, so the game state is special time saving game state The player can be made aware at an appropriate time to transition to .

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine does not display the alert video on the display device 2007 when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the number of operations n related to B time saving, so that the ceiling time saving rush effect is lengthened. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine shifts when the number of times of variation of special symbols reaches the number of times n of operations relating to time saving B rather than the time of variation of the first special symbols in the special time-saving game state shifted from the jackpot game state. In order to lengthen the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the special time-saving game state, time is secured to notify that the special symbol has shifted to the special time-saving game state by reaching the number of operations n related to B time-saving. can do.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine establishes a special flag for the first variation of the special symbol in the special time-saving gaming state that has shifted due to the number of times of operation n related to B time-saving, and the special flag When the flag is established, the fluctuation time of the special design is added.

For this reason, the fourth pachinko game machine refers to the special time-saving game state shifted by the number of times of operation n related to B time-saving, and the special time-saving game state shifted from the jackpot game state. Without changing the variation pattern table selection table, it is possible to secure the time for informing the transition to the special time-saving game state by the number of times of variation of special symbols reaching the number of times n of operations relating to B time-saving.

The fourth pachinko game machine described above can be applied to, for example, a pachislot machine, a slot machine using game balls, an enclosed game machine, and a mahball game machine, regardless of the pachinko game machine.

[5-6. Note]
[5-6-1. Appendix 1]
In the conventional game machine, there is a problem that if the announcement effect is monotonous, the player's interest in the game is reduced (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-259639).

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from losing interest in a game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

<<First Invention>>
It has a variable display portion (for example, the first special symbol display portion 2163 and the second special symbol display portion 2164) that can variably display a plurality of identification information,
In a gaming machine for deriving a variation result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after variably displaying the variable display unit,
A normal game state, a specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a predetermined game value that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and is given to the player. a game state transition means (for example, the main CPU 2201) capable of transitioning the game state between a plurality of game states including a possible special game state (for example, a jackpot game state);
Effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of executing effects according to the game state;
with
The production executing means is
Any effect including a first effect state (for example, a continuous mode) and a second effect state (for example, a charge mode) different from the first effect state as the effect state that can be executed in the specific game state. state can be transitioned to, and
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one of the first rendering state and the second rendering state, when the variable display portion has changed a predetermined number of times in one rendering state, it is possible to shift to the other rendering state.
<<Second invention>>
The effect executing means, when either a first condition (for example, when the jackpot ends) or a second condition different from the first condition (for example, reaching B time reduction) is satisfied, the effect state to the first effect state.
<<Third Invention>>
The production executing means is
As an effect state that can be executed in the specific game state, it is possible to shift to a third effect state (for example, art run mode) different from the first effect state and the second effect state,
The gaming machine as described above, wherein when the first condition is satisfied, the effect state can be shifted to either the first effect state or the third effect state.
<<Fourth Invention>>
The effect execution means is capable of executing an effect state transition effect that indicates to a player that the effect state will transition when the effect state is shifted from the first effect state to the second effect state,
The game machine described above, wherein the effect state transition effect is an effect that can be continuously executed until a predetermined condition is established.
<<Fifth invention>>
holding information storage means (for example, main RAM 2203) capable of storing a predetermined number of holding information for holding display results derived by the variable display unit;
A display means (for example, a display device 2007) that displays an image by the effect executed by the effect execution means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a series of result display effects showing the variation result of the variable display being executed and the variation result of the predetermined number of pending information stored in the pending information storage means,
The gaming machine described above, wherein the series of result display effects are effects that can be executed in the second effect state.
<<Sixth invention>>
During execution of the variable display capable of transitioning to the special game state, a special effect can be executed to notify that the variable result indicating transition to the special game state is derived after the variable display is stopped. ,
The special performance is
Execution is possible when the holding information stored in the holding information storage means includes information that allows the transition to the special game state,
The above description, characterized in that the effect is executable in one of the first effect state and the second effect state, but is not executed in the other effect state (for example, a suspended continuous effect). game machine.
<<Seventh Invention>>
The series of result display effects can execute a plurality of types of predetermined effects with different expectations (for example, fairy zone, Shinto zone, volcano zone, and divine attack zone effects),
The plurality of types of predetermined effects are produced at different rates depending on whether or not the variable display being executed and the hold information stored in the hold information storage means include those for transitioning to the special game state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that any one of the predetermined effects can be executed.
<<Eighth Invention>>
The display means includes a first region capable of variably displaying a specific pattern (for example, a first decorative pattern 2501) and a second region capable of variably displaying a predetermined pattern (for example, a second decorative pattern 2502) different from the specific pattern. including at least a region and
The series of result display effect is a effect suggesting a variation result of the specific symbol displayed in the first area,
When the variable display result of the specific pattern is derived in the first region, the variable display or stop display of the predetermined pattern for the reserved information stored in the reserved information storage means is executed in the second region. The game machine described above, characterized in that
<<Ninth invention>>
When the series of results display effect is started when the number of the pending information stored in the pending information storage means is less than the predetermined number, the special When the suspension information determined to shift to the gaming state is newly stored,
displaying, on the display means, an effect result indicating that the special game state is not to be entered as a result of the series of result display effects;
The above description characterized in that, after the effect result indicating that the special game state is not to be displayed is displayed, the effect result indicating that the special game state is to be transitioned can be displayed in the predetermined symbol of the second area. game machine.
<<Tenth Invention>>
The effect execution means is capable of executing one specific effect out of a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, roulette effect) before executing the predetermined effect,
Among the plurality of types of specific effects, one of the plurality of types of specific effects can be executed at a different rate according to the type of the predetermined effect executed after the specific effect is executed,
The production executing means is
A first specific effect execution pattern (for example, a first effect zone determination effect, a third effect zone determination effect effect pattern) for executing the predetermined effect after executing the specific effect,
and a second specific effect execution pattern (for example, a second effect zone determination effect effect pattern) that executes the predetermined effect without executing the specific effect.
<<11th invention>>
The production executing means is
Suggesting to the player the degree of expectation as to whether or not the change display during fluctuation and the hold information stored in the hold information storage means include those that satisfy the conditions for shifting to the special game state. It is possible to execute an expectation suggesting performance to
The expectation level suggestion production is
a first expectation level suggesting effect execution pattern in which the predetermined effect is executed after the expectation level suggesting effect is executed;
A second expectation level suggesting performance for newly executing at least one expectation level suggesting performance after the execution of the expectation level suggesting performance, and executing the predetermined performance after the newly executed expectation level suggesting performance. The above-described gaming machine, wherein the expectation level suggesting effect can be executed in any effect pattern including an execution pattern (for example, the effect pattern of the second effect zone determination effect).
<<Twelfth invention>>
The production executing means is
A plurality of sets of the series result display effect are produced in the second effect state, with the series result display effect for the variable display being executed and the predetermined number of the hold information sequentially stored in the hold information storage means as one set. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is executable.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[5-6-2. Appendix 2]
In conventional gaming machines, if the special game does not operate, the variable time reduction game and the probability variable game do not operate, so the game becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player's interest in the game is reduced (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-99253).

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from losing interest in a game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

<<First Invention>>
It has a variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display unit 2163 and the second special symbol display unit 2164) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information,
In a gaming machine for deriving a variation result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after variably displaying the variable display unit,
Game state transition means (for example, main CPU 2201);
Variation pattern selection means (for example, main CPU 2201) capable of selecting a variation pattern for executing the variation display game based on a variation pattern table;
Production execution means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of executing production,
with
The fluctuation pattern table is
A normal variation pattern table that can be selected during the normal game state;
At least a specific variation pattern table that can be selected in the specific game state,
The specific variation pattern table is based on the establishment of at least one of the first condition (for example, when the jackpot ends) or a second condition different from the first condition (for example, reaching B time reduction). is a variation pattern table selected by
The production executing means is
When the game state shifts to the specific game state, it is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a ceiling time reduction rush effect and / and a win end time reduction effect) that notifies the transition to the specific game state. game machine.
<<Second Invention>>
The specific fluctuation pattern table is
A first specific variation pattern table selected when the game state transitions to the specific game state;
and a second specific variation pattern table selected after the variable display unit executes a predetermined number of the variation display games based on the first specific variation pattern table. game machine.
<<Third Invention>>
The production executing means is
In the normal game state,
a first suggestion effect (for example, a full rotation effect) that suggests to the player that the first condition is satisfied;
A second suggestive effect (for example, a ceiling time-saving predictive effect) that suggests to the player that the second condition is satisfied, and
that the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect may be executed in one of the variable display games based on the number of times the variable display section has changed a predetermined number of times in the normal game state; A gaming machine as described above, characterized in that:
<<Fourth Invention>>
The effect execution means includes a notification effect executed when the first condition is satisfied (for example, a short rush effect at the end of winning) and a notification effect executed when the second condition is satisfied (for example, ceiling The above-described gaming machine, wherein at least a part of the time-saving rush effect (for example, an image related to the shield acquisition effect and the title image) can be executed in a common effect mode.
<<Fifth Invention>>
When the second condition is satisfied, the effect execution means provides the notification until a specific condition (for example, the start of variation of the second special symbol) is satisfied on condition that the variable display game is executed. The gaming machine as described above, characterized in that it does not execute an effect.
<<Sixth Invention>>
Equipped with a measuring means (for example, sub CPU 2301) for measuring time,
When the first condition is satisfied, the effect executing means determines that the measurement by the measuring means reaches a specific time regardless of the fluctuation state of the variable display unit (e.g., shifts to a special time-saving game state The gaming machine described above, wherein the notification effect can be executed based on the start of the end interval of the jackpot game state.
<<Seventh Invention>>
The production executing means is
When the first condition is satisfied, the notification effect can be executed before shifting to the specific game state,
The gaming machine described above, wherein when the second condition is satisfied, the notification effect can be executed during the first variation display game after shifting to the specific game state.
<<Eighth Invention>>
The production executing means is
When shifting to the specific game state based on the establishment of the first condition, it is possible to display a warning display (for example, a warning video) that calls the player to a predetermined attention,
The gaming machine as described above, wherein the attention-calling display is not displayed when shifting to the specific game state based on the establishment of the second condition.
<<Ninth invention>>
The first variation display game in the specific game state to which the transition is made when the first condition is established is the first variation display game in the specific game state to which the transition is made when the second condition is established. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the rate at which the variable display game with a shorter variable time is executed is higher than the above-described gaming machine.
<<Tenth Invention>>
The variation pattern selection means is capable of establishing a special flag with respect to the first variation of the variable display portion in the specific game state shifted by the establishment of the second condition,
When the special flag is established, in addition to the variation time based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means, the variation display game can be executed with a variation time obtained by adding a predetermined amount of time. can be,
The production executing means is
The gaming machine as described above, wherein the notification effect can be executed during the variation time of the variable display section added by the variation pattern selection means.
<<11th Invention>>
The variation pattern selection means is
The gaming machine as described above, wherein the special flag is not established with respect to the first change of the variable display section in the specific game state shifted by the establishment of the first condition.
<<Twelfth Invention>>
The special flag can be established when the game state transition means shifts from the normal game state to the specific game state, while the game state shift means shifts from the specific game state to the normal game state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that the flag is sometimes not established.
<<Thirteenth Invention>>
The gaming machine described above, wherein the special flag is a flag that is established when the second condition is established.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

2007 display device (display means)
2163 1st special symbol display section (variable display section)
2164 Second special symbol display section (variable display section)
2201 Main CPU (game state transition means, variation pattern selection means)
2203 Main RAM (holding information storage means)
2301 Sub CPU (effect executing means)

Claims (1)

having a variable display unit capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information;
In a gaming machine for deriving a variation result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after variably displaying the variable display unit,
game state transition means capable of transitioning game states between a plurality of game states including a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
variation pattern selection means capable of selecting a variation pattern for executing the variation display game based on a variation pattern table;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
hold information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of hold information for holding display results derived by the variable display unit;
with
The fluctuation pattern table is
A normal variation pattern table that can be selected during the normal game state;
At least a specific variation pattern table that can be selected in the specific game state,
The specific variation pattern table is a variation pattern table selected based on the establishment of at least one of a first condition or a second condition different from the first condition,
The production executing means is
When the game state transitions to the specific game state, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying the transition to the specific game state,
when the second condition is satisfied, the notification effect is not executed until a specific condition that the variable display game is executed is satisfied;
It is possible to execute a series of result display effects for displaying one result summarizing the variation result of the variable display being executed and the variation result of the predetermined number of pending information stored in the pending information storage means,
The series of result display effects are executed in different execution modes depending on whether or not the variable display being executed and the hold information stored in the hold information storage means include a transition to a special game state. It is a production that can be done,
It is possible to display a display corresponding to the number of times the series of result display effects are executed before the series of result display effects are executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images